KINGDOM OF DEATH AND HOPE

KINGDOM OF BELLHOLLOW

BOOK THREE

MAEVE KENSINGTON

Copyright © 2026 by Maeve Kensington

All rights reserved.

No part of this book may be reproduced in any form or by any electronic or mechanical means, including information storage and retrieval systems, without written permission from the author, except for the use of brief quotations in a book review.

Editor & Proofreader: Keeley at The Author Archive

Cover Artist: Maria Spada

Map Artist: Maeve Kensington

AUTHOR NOTE

Triggers:

Brief talk about suicide

Torture

whipping

Hanging (death)

BLURB

Don’t engage with the Prince. Stay away from the Witch. Marry Kieran Morrentino. 

Adeline Duvall never thought she would get torn away from everyone she knew after passing the magic book to Kieran. Questioned and tortured, Adeline tries to navigate life away from her people while trying to stay alive while the Fae figured out how to break the curse.

With the weight of keeping everything a secret, Adeline doesn’t know if she can live on but encouragement from the Fae, especially her mate, gives her the spark she needs to continue to live on.

Torn between keeping secrets and duty, Adeline will have to decide who to trust, the Fae who has proven to be on her side or the prince who seems to genuinely care for her now.

CHAPTER 1

An intense, searing pain spreads throughout my body as Avira takes another step toward me. How does she know I took the magic book?

“What are you talking about?” I ask.

“You know that you took the magic book from my room,” she says.

“Avira, I don’t know what you’re talking about. I’ve never been in your room in the palace. I don’t even know where it is, and what magic book? Is there even such a thing?” I continue on with ignorance.

How did she find out about it so fast? Can she track where it is right now?

Kieran, be careful with the book, I tell him. I know you already know, but don’t let anyone you don’t trust hold it or get close to it at all.

I take a deep breath and slowly let it out as Avira and I continue to look at each other. I thought we were still going to have time before anyone found out that the book was missing. A day at least… not a couple of hours.

Are you okay? Kieran asks. Your emotions are all over the place.

I’m okay for now. Avira is asking me questions.

Is Henry still with you?

No. My voice cracks, showing how I truly feel.

Nerves and terror run through me with each passing thought. What if Avira finds out that I actually took the book? There are so many things that could happen to me. I have no doubt that she will turn me in to the witch.

We might be sisters but we aren’t that close, and she always chooses work over family.

Take a deep breath and calm down. Nothing bad is going to happen to you. Just continue with what you have said and eventually she will leave you alone, Kieran tells me. Everything is going to be okay. You said no one saw you enter or exit the room besides Henry and he won’t tell anyone. You’re safe.

But I don’t feel safe. The glare Avira is giving me tells me she is not going anywhere until I tell her the truth.

Okay, I whisper.

Kieran tugs on the bond and relief washes over me, my shoulders dropping.

“Don’t play dumb with me. You know what book I’m talking about. Your scent was everywhere in the palace when we got back,” Avira says.

She takes another step closer to me and I take one back, trying to maintain the distance between us.

“Avira, you have to believe me. I don’t have it,” I practically beg her. “I was in the palace earlier with Henry because the prince wants me to get familiar with the layout before we get married. I knew he wasn’t going to be there so I thought it would be the perfect opportunity since he wouldn’t be able to stop and distract me.”

“The smell of the book is all over you. I know you have it so tell me where it is right now,” Avira demands.

I clasp my hands together, taking a shaky breath in. “I don’t know what book you’re talking about.”

I have to keep up with this lie and hope that soon she will forget about it and everything will go back to normal.

Avira cocks her head to the left and searches for something on my face. “I don’t think you’re telling the truth.”

“Avira, I would never lie to you about something like this. I didn’t take anything from the palace. I don’t want anything from there,” I lie again. “You know that I don’t want to be anywhere near the palace so why would I take something from there?”

“Because you are trying to help the Fae,” Avira declares.

I suck in a breath, everything around me is muffled and blurred as I look at her.

Shit.

Have I not been good enough at hiding what my true intentions were the whole time? I have never mentioned anything to Avira about wanting to help the Fae. The closest I got was when I talked about liking someone else that wasn’t the prince.

“I’m not helping the Fae. I don’t talk to them at all,” I reply. “I don’t like you accusing me of things that I clearly have not done.”

Her eyes narrow on me.

“You know me,” I whisper.

“I know that you have sympathy for the Fae. Any time they get whipped, I know that you want it to stop and have begged for it as well,” Avira points out.

“And you know that I do that for humans as well. You know I do not like violence one bit, so it’s not just toward the Fae,” I explain. “I have always been like that and it will not change. I try not to care about the Fae when they are getting whipped or killed but I can’t help it when I don’t want to look at it.”

Nerves run through my body, making me nauseous as I wait for her answer. Please believe me so I don’t have to continue to lie right now.

“I know there is something up with you and the Fae and I’m going to prove it.” Her voice is hard as she speaks. “I know you took the magic book.”

“Avira, I didn’t take any book today like you said I did.”

“Today?” She raises an eyebrow.

Shit.

Adeline? What’s wrong? Kieran asks.

“So you took a book a different day?” she asks, cocking her head to the side.

“Avira,” I take a deep breath. “I⁠—”

“What book did you take?”

“There was a book lying on the floor of the palace one day and I didn’t know what it was. I was going to give it to someone so they could figure out who it belonged to, but then Prince Archie stopped me and I hid it in my bag in case he accused me of stealing,” I quickly explain. “I don’t even know what the book was about but I knew when I saw you next that I was going to give it to you because I knew you wouldn’t accuse me of stealing.”

Adeline, answer me. Kieran’s voice is fierce. Answer me right now. Where are you? Are you okay? I can feel your panic like it is my own.

Please believe me.

I’m okay. I’m still talking to my sister, I reply.

Go home. It is not good for you to be outside this late. You are going to get sick, he says. Promise that you will tell me when you get home safely and away from your sister.

Okay.

“So where is the book now?” Avira asks.

“It got lost when I went to Hellhollow last time. I went hunting and I fell down a small hill and I must have lost it there,” I explain.

How am I going to keep all of my lies straight? I don’t even remember some of the lies I told Prince Archie and the king.

“Really?” she asks.

I nod.

Avira takes a step forward. “I think you’re lying.”

My eyes widen a fraction before I school my expression. “I promise, I’m not. I really did fall down with my bag when we went to Hellhollow.”

“Grab her,” Avira commands.

I look around right as hands grip my biceps on both sides, holding me completely still.

“Avira, please don’t do this. I promise I’m telling the truth. I didn’t take the book on purpose,” I beg her.

She takes another step toward me, our faces inches apart.

“I don’t believe you. Do you want to know why?” she asks.

“Please, Avira. I’m your sister,” I whisper.

She chuckles and shakes her head. “You aren’t my sister.”

“Don’t say that. Please, Avira. We were getting along. We have a bond together!” I raise my voice.

“You just don’t get it, do you?” she tsks. “That’s okay. I’ll show you.”

My eyebrows bunch together as I stare at her.

“You aren’t making any sense. Please, just let me go home. Someone in town probably has the book. Maybe one of the other hunters. They would have found it whenever they went hunting,” I try to reason with her. “But I don’t have it any longer.”

Avira looks me dead in the eye and snaps her fingers. Before I even know what is happening, everything around us changes to a damp, cold, concrete room and I’m sitting in a chair with my wrists bound to the arms and my ankles tied to the legs.

“Wh-what?” I whisper.

Avira is still standing in front of me with bars behind her.

“What just happened?” I ask. “How did we get here?”

She chuckles and takes several steps toward me. “You really haven’t put it together yet.”

“Avira, let me out of here. I have done nothing wrong!” I raise my voice.

“You took something that belonged to me. My precious spell book,” she says. “I told you already. I’m not your sister. That was all a ploy.”

My head swirls as she says those words. “What do you mean?”

Avira just stares at me, a smirk forming on her face as the silence between us stretches.

“I’m the witch.”

CHAPTER 2

Ringing forms in my ears as those words bounce around in my head. Avira is the witch? No, that’s not possible.

She’s my sister.

There are so many memories with her growing up, and mother talked about giving birth to her and the pain she went through.

“No,” I whisper and shake my head.

“Everything was a lie.” A smile spreads across her face. “Do you know how much enjoyment I got out of fooling everyone?”

I choke on air as I try to fill my lungs.

Adeline, what’s wrong? Kieran asks.

Numb.

Everything is going numb as Avira continues to talk. She has to be lying.

“Do you know why I got so much enjoyment out of it?” she asks.

Adeline, where are you? I can’t see you standing out in front of your house like you were before. What is going on? Kieran asks again.

I don’t know where I am, I whisper.

What do you mean? Adeline, what happened?

“It’s because I got to see people suffer. The thought of seeing their world crumble when I told them that I wasn’t related to them. It brings me joy to see other people suffering,” Avira chuckles.

“You’re lying,” I choke out.

Avira grips my face, her fingernails digging into my cheeks, bringing a little clarity to everything.

Adeline. Tell me where you are right now and I will come and get you, Kieran’s voice rings in my head. I’m worried about you. I can feel your fear.

“Your mother never gave birth to me. I cast a spell on everyone in town so they thought I was part of your family,” she explains. “I fabricated that she went through childbirth and helped me grow up. I made sure she felt every single emotion that a mother would go through.”

“But—”

“They are all fake memories for everyone. It never happened,” she chuckles. “Whenever I lift the spell no one will remember me, not even you. It will be like I was never there.”

“Why?” I whisper. “Why would you do something like that?”

Part of me still doesn’t believe that she’s the witch. Nothing is making any sense.

“I needed to see what the humans were doing. The real thing and not some report that could be made up. So I cast a spell to make everyone think that I was part of your family so I could get a first hand account and see for myself,” she explains.

“But everyone knew you worked for the king,” I say.

She shrugs. “People got over it once I showed that I was for the people.”

“You weren’t.” My eyebrows scrunch up.

When was she ever for the people? Every single time I heard her talk to anyone it only made me think that she was with the king and no one else. How did other people believe that she was with the people?

“To you I wasn’t. For some reason the spell never quite worked on you,” she says. “I was never able to figure out why it didn’t but you saw part of the truth. That’s why I had to keep an eye on you, pretending that I really wanted to get to know you.”

Tears cloud my vision. I thought she really wanted to become closer and be sisters. How could I have been so foolish and actually believe the lie? Why couldn’t I have gone with my gut and realized that everything was a lie?

“I’ll be back in a couple of hours,” she says as she exits the room.

“Avira, please don’t leave me here!” I beg her. “I don’t deserve to be here. Please come back!”

I suck in a deep breath as she walks out of my line of sight, everything sinking in. She’s really gone and I’m stuck in this room tied to a chair.

“Avira!” I scream.

Hanging my head, I let the tears fall from my eyes as the cold seeps into my body.

Adeline. Kieran’s soft voice fills my head. Talk to me. Tell me what is going on and what is around you.

Avira knows I took the book even if I try to deny it, I whisper, even more tears falling down my face.

Where are you? he asks, his voice hard.

I’m in some sort of concrete cell. I think I’m in the dungeon, I reply. Kieran, she is the witch. My sister, I mean, Avira is the witch and always has been.

My mind is whirling with each interaction I had with her. All the bad feelings I had around her, the same ones I had when I walked into the witch’s room.

How did I not notice it was her sooner?

She has always given me a bad feeling and I never saw it. I wanted to give her the benefit of the doubt since she was my sister.

No.

She was never my sister. It was all a ploy to spy on the people.

How could I have been so stupid? I ask Kieran. How could I have not known? How did we not figure it out sooner? You told me so many times that you smelt her on me and yet I didn’t want to believe that it was my sister.

Adeline, it’s going to be okay, he replies.

I don’t know if I’m going to make it out alive. If I don’t, please continue on with trying to figure out the curse, I tell him. And tell my mom that I love her. She knows about you and is happy that I found someone.

Adeline, don’t talk like this. Nothing is going to happen. Everything is going to be alright. We are going to get you out of the dungeon and back home to your mother. We are going to find out how to break the curse, Kieran says fiercely.

Promise me that if anything happens to me that you will look after my mother. That you will tell her everything.

Adeline.

Kieran, please. Just promise me that you will. I don’t want her to second guess everything for the rest of her life if I die. I want her to know that I love her. I want her to know how proud I was to have her as a mother, I ramble. Just promise me that you will tell her if anything happens to me.

Nothing is going to happen to you and you can tell her yourself when you get out of the dungeon, Kieran replies.

Tears roll down my face as I take a heaving breath.

Kieran.

He sighs. I promise that if anything happens I will tell your mother. Don’t worry. But I also want to hear you say that you are going to make it out alive and get to tell her yourself.

I don’t know if I can do that, I whisper.

Avira was looking at me the whole time she explained everything with hatred. She hates me as much as she hates the Fae. I don’t think I’m going to make it out alive.

Adeline, I promised that I would tell your mother and now you have to repeat those words to me. Nothing is going to happen to you and you are going to make it out alive. Say those words. That you are going to make it out alive and be by my side.

I’m going to make it out alive and be by your side, I manage to get out.

But dread fills me after I say those words. What if I can’t keep the promise and I actually die in this cell?

Do not think like that, Kieran growls. Be positive. Be strong. You can make it through anything if you tell yourself that you can. I just need you to be strong and brave for me right now. Can you do that?

I slowly let out a breath as I think over his words. Will I actually be able to do that for him? I’m scared out of my mind, and I don’t know if I can find an ounce of strength right now.

Adeline, can you be strong and brave for me right now? You need to be strong for me, Kieran says.

Okay, I whisper.

I want you to believe it. I’m going to talk to Henry and we are going to get you out of there, Kieran promises. Just hang in there until we can.

Tell Henry to talk to my mom. Tell her that everything is okay. I don’t want her to worry about me. Tell him to come up with some type of lie so that she doesn’t worry. And Elias still needs to help out there once a week. My mother is going to be swamped with everything and the baby. She is going to need help, I rush to tell him.

I don’t know if we are going to have another situation where we won’t be able to talk to each other. I need him to know so that she can continue on with her life and not worry.

I’ll let him know. Don’t worry, we will take care of your mother the best we can. She is part of our family, Kieran replies.

I exhale and lean my head back, looking up at the concrete ceiling. I need to believe that I am going to get out of here alive like Kieran says.

I’m scared, I whisper, letting myself be vulnerable right now. She said she’s going to be back in a couple of hours and I don’t know what she has planned. What if she tells the prince and he calls off the deal and kills you? What if she goes after my family and decides to make them suffer because of what I did?

I don’t think she would risk telling the prince anything. That would put her in a compromising situation since you said no one but the king knows who she is, Kieran replies.

I promise I didn’t tell her anything about the book that would lead to you. I told her that I didn’t take it today and had found a random book on the ground several weeks ago before I went to Hellhollow and it fell out of my bag when hunting. I had to come up with a lie and I knew that this wouldn’t bring it back to you, I rush to explain. I made a mistake when I spoke and said that I had taken nothing today and she caught on. I’m sorry.

Everything is going to be okay. Stick to your story and everything is going to work out. Whenever you need strength, contact me and I will help you. You are not alone, Kieran whispers.

“Did you miss me?” Avira pops up right in front of me.

CHAPTER 3

Screaming, I rear my head back, tipping my chair and making me fall backward. My eyes widen as I see the ceiling move in slow motion.

Pain.

Sharp, blinding pain spreads across the back of my head as I lay on the ground, still tied to the chair.

Avira’s face appears above me and she smiles. “I’ll take that as a yes. Too bad I didn’t miss you back. In fact, I didn’t want to come back to you, but I knew I had to.”

Everything around her spins as we stay in this position, my head throbbing with each passing second.

Sweets! Kieran yells in my head, making me flinch.

I moan in pain, tugging at the rope around my wrists. All I want to do right now is cradle my head in my hands and curl up into a ball.

But I can do neither.

“Let’s get you sitting up… how you should be,” she says. “If you feel like puking, please hold it in. Unless you want your cell to smell like puke until you get out of here… if you ever get out of here,” she mumbles.

Why are you in pain? What is she doing to you? Kieran fires off questions.

I just fell backward on my chair and couldn’t stop myself, I tell him. Everything is okay. I’m okay and sitting back up straight.

I completely forgot about him being able to feel all of my emotions and pain. How am I going to keep this from him so he doesn’t come storming into the dungeon to get me?

Adeline, I can tell when you lie.

I inhale slowly, closing my eyes as Avira snaps her fingers and my chair flies forward with me in it, back into a sitting position. Nausea rumbles in my stomach as everything spins around me.

I’m really okay. I just got scared and forgot that I was attached to a chair, I reply, trying to reassure him.

“I was really hoping that you would puke so that you could smell it and be in even more misery. Such a shame,” Avira sighs. “Maybe today we can make you puke and scream for mercy.”

I’m so glad Kieran can’t hear what Avira is saying. Now I just need to have enough strength to block him out from my pain.

Don’t you even think about it, Kieran growls in my mind.

I’m not thinking about doing anything, I reply, hoping he believes my lie.

How did he know what I wanted to attempt to do? It’s like he could read my mind but I know that he can’t. I have asked him so many times and he has always told me that unless I project my thoughts to him, he can only feel my emotions.

Because I know you, Adeline. I know that you won’t want me to feel any of your pain and try to save me, but I don’t want you to do that, he says.

It’s too bad that he wants to feel my pain because when I figure out how to keep it up while Avira is here and hurting me, I will have it up. I know if Kieran constantly feels me in pain that he is going to come into the palace and try to find me, resulting in himself getting captured and more than likely getting killed in the end.

I don’t want you to die, I whisper. I know you as well.

Avira grips my cheeks tightly, digging her nails into my face as she gets close to me. “What did you do with the book?”

I stare into her eyes. “I didn’t do anything. I don’t have the book.”

She growls and pushes my face to the right. Moaning, I move my jaw around, trying to get rid of the aching pain from her nails.

What is she doing to you now? Kieran asks. Tell me everything so that when I get my hands on her, I will make her suffer ten times more than she is making you suffer.

The right side of my lip twitches up at his possessiveness. He is going to have a lot of people to get revenge on when the curse is broken. But I don’t mind one bit.

“I know you took the book from my room today. The smell is all over you.” She waves her hand over my whole body. “Do you really think I wouldn’t put some type of smell on the book so I knew who took it from me? I knew the day would come that someone would take the book, and I was prepared.”

“I don’t have it.”

“I never thought it was going to be you who took the book,” she rattles on, ignoring me. “I didn’t think you were smart enough, let alone brave enough to go into my room and find it.” She takes a step closer to me. “Which begs the question. How did you know it would be in my room, and how did you know what it looked like?”

Adeline, if you do not answer me I am going to storm into the castle and find you, Kieran growls.

Don’t you dare, I reply. We have come so far and we are not going to waste this opportunity. She has done nothing to me yet but ask questions.

“Who told you what it looked like?” she asks, bending down to my eye level. “Tell me who and I will let you go.”

“No one told me what it looked like because I didn’t take the book. I don’t know what you’re talking about,” I say.

Intense fiery pain engulfs the left side of my face as her hand connects with my cheek. Tears prick my eyes as I move my head back to where it was.

“Stop lying!” she screams. “I know you took it so just answer my question honestly and I will let you go!”

Sweets, what was that? Kieran asks.

Tingles spread across my chest as I take in several deep breaths, trying to calm myself before I have a breakdown. Having Avira talk to me while Kieran also wants to know everything is getting overwhelming and I don’t know how much more I can take.

Avira lightly taps the cheek she slapped, making it ache even more.

“If you were just honest and told me where you heard what the book looked like then you would be out of here and back to your mother and younger brother,” she chuckle. “How did you even know there was a book? It must have been someone who told you. Someone who knew about everything that actually went down all of those years ago.”

Avira takes a step back, her eyes going wide as she stares at me. Ever so slowly a smile spreads across her face.

“I know who told you.” She sounds so happy as she says those words. “It must have been a Fae. Someone who was there back when it all happened and could remember everything.”

My stomach sinks at her words. She is figuring everything out on her own. Before I know it, she’s going to have all the information and I won’t be able to do anything about it.

“Who is the Fae?” she asks.

“I don’t know what you’re talking about. I have told you countless times that I don’t talk to the Fae. I don’t interact with them, besides the man you got to help out with the chores,” I reply.

If there is one thing I can do before I die, it’s keep the Fae all safe from this. I don’t want them to be caught up in this and get punished for me stealing the book.

Intense pain forms in my stomach and I move forward, yelling out in pain. Wh-what is going on?

“With every lie you tell me, the more pain you are going to feel. Is it really worth it?” she asks.

The pain stops and I take several deep breaths in, trying to stop myself from puking.

Adeline, tell me when to come and get you and I will. I will stop everything to come and save you. I do not care what happens to me. I do not want you in pain, Kieran says. Please.

A single tear falls from my eyes at his plea. He sounds so desperate to come and get me.

“Is it worth saving the person you love?” she whispers in my ear.

I rear back, my mouth open as I stare at her.

She knows.

A wicked smile spreads across her face.

“I remember you talking about a person who you liked and it wasn’t the prince. You’re doing all of this for him, aren’t you?” she asks.

“I don’t know what you’re talking about,” I whisper, not sounding confident at all.

Sweets. Kieran’s voice breaks. I don’t want you in pain.

Everything is okay. I am fine, I lie.

Kieran tugs at the bond, making me suck in a breath.

“What did he do for you to fall so in love with him? How did he brainwash you into thinking that you should help them?” She walks back and forth in the room. “I thought everyone in town hated the Fae and wanted them dead. I know you hated violence but I didn’t think you were that sympathetic with them.”

My eyes track her movements as I stay silent, letting her talk and come up with wild accusations. Maybe she will come up with some bizarre reasoning that is so far from the truth and she’ll stick with it.

“That’s okay, though. The Fae are all going to die soon anyways,” she chuckles. “The prince has a plan to become king sooner than planned and I think I might actually let him do it.”

My eyebrows bunch together as I process her words.

“I never thought the day would come when the Fae would all die, but it’s coming a lot sooner than I thought. How exciting,” she says as her shoulders pull up, a big smile on her face.

“Why are you telling me this?” I ask.

She shrugs. “I want the realization to sink in that the one you love is going to die soon, you are going to marry the prince, and there is nothing you can do about it.”

Biting my lower lip, I stop myself from spewing out things she shouldn’t know. I need to be smart about this.

“I’ll be back tomorrow. Let you think about everything I just said and what kind of situation you’re in. Maybe then you’ll be more willing to answer my questions,” she says, and walks out of the door.

CHAPTER 4

The light on the side of the right wall stays on the whole time, flickering every once in a while. I don’t know how long has passed since Avira left the room but it feels like eternity. My stomach still aches with each deep breath I take.

How long has passed since I got taken? I ask Kieran.

It’s the middle of the next day. You’ve been gone for almost a whole day, he replies.

Tears pool in my eyes and I tilt my head back, blinking several times to stop myself from crying.

Has Henry gone to talk to my mother? I ask. Has anyone else noticed that I’m gone? Have you gotten closer to figuring out if you can break the curse?

I can’t help but ask questions. Even though I’ve only been gone a day, it feels like it’s been months and I’m missing out on everything.

Henry did go and talk to your mom. He said she was worried about you but that she understood that you had to do something at the palace and didn’t know when you would be back. We have not gotten closer to figuring out if we can break the curse yet or not. We have been focused on you, Kieran replies.

Focused on me? Why? You need to figure out how to break the curse before it’s too late, I rush out.

Before it’s too late? It will be too late if you are dead. He trails off at the end.

Avira says that the prince is thinking about becoming king before it was originally planned. I think he is debating killing his father, and when he does that, he has talked about killing all of the Fae right away multiple times. You need to figure out how to break the curse before that happens. My voice is full of panic.

My chest rises and falls as I think about all the possible scenarios that are going through my head. What my life is going to be like if the prince succeeds and becomes king before his time and kills off all of the Fae. I don’t want to see any of them die, especially not Kieran.

I don’t think I would be able to live without them.

I haven’t known any of them long, but they have a place in my heart… a place in my life and they aren’t going anywhere.

Calm down, Sweets. The prince is not going to do anything like that right now. There is too much going on with the Fae in some other towns. It would be foolish for the prince to try and take over right now, Kieran tries to tell me.

You can’t stay focused on me. You have to figure out the spell.

I’m not going to forget you. You are my mate!

I am your mate but our people are counting on you to figure out how to break the curse!

And they are counting on me to bring my mate back alive. Their future High Lady!

I take a deep breath and close my eyes, trying to calm myself down. Right now is not the time to get into a disagreement.

I know you’re worried about me. I’m worried about me, but I need you to figure out how to break the curse so that you can as soon as possible. If I’m still in here by the time you figure it out then you can come and rescue me without there being any bad consequences, I try to reason with him.

Kieran stays silent and worry forms inside. Did I say something wrong, or were we disconnected somehow?

If you were in my place, you would do absolutely everything you could to get me out of the dungeon. You have done it before when we were caught in the forest earlier this year, Kieran says. And yet you expect me to do nothing when it comes to you? How does that make any sense?

I look up at the ceiling and take several seconds to think about everything he has said.

Yes, I did do everything in my power to make sure you didn’t get killed.

And you made sure even after I got separated from my people, that I was placed with them again. You did it almost every single day, he reminds me.

But I had people stop me from doing what I actually wanted to do. I had guards watching over me at all times so I couldn’t do what I really wanted to do, which was go to you. Find you and see if you were okay with my own eyes. I had to rely on other people to make sure that you were okay and to relay messages about other things, I tell him.

But you are telling me to only focus on figuring out how to break the curse and not you.

I sigh.

He does have a point there. I just don’t know if he will have enough strength to focus on me and the book if something happens to me. Will he break and go after the royal family before they have the key on how to break the curse and all the Fae end up dying?

I can’t allow that to happen.

I’m worried that you are going to come and try to find me and everything will go down the drain when they catch you. I don’t want you getting caught and then no one knowing what to do because both of us are locked up or dead. I want you to think about everyone and not just me, I whisper.

Anger. Sadness. Annoyance.

All these emotions flow through me and I know that they are Kieran’s feelings.

I’m sorry. My voice breaks.

I understand what you’re saying but you’re my mate. You’re the person I have spent my whole life looking for and right now I do want to go to you and make sure that you are safe. Yes I do understand that I have an obligation to my people, and to focus on finding out how to break the curse, but I don’t want to. I want to focus on you.

Tears pool in my eyes and I quickly close them.

I now understand what my father talked about when he mentioned my future mate and how difficult it was going to be for me. It’s taking everything in me not to come right now but I am strong enough. I just need you not to block me out and answer me when I talk to you, or else I will break every rule and forget about the people so I can come and save you. His voice is raw with every single emotion.

I will try. Avira has been talking to me so I don’t know if I will be able to respond right away if I’m trying to pay attention to what she’s saying, I reply, completely ignoring him asking me not to block him out.

He sighs. I understand.

Silence fills the bond and I finally open my eyes. The light flickers and I flinch.

Henry said he is going to try and meet up with you soon to give you some food and figure out how to get you out of there, but we have to be careful. He can’t let on that he knows who the witch is or she’s going to change her identity and we are back at square one, Kieran tells me.

“I don’t remember the last time I ate,” I mumble to myself.

That is why he’s coming to give you food. The witch no doubt is going to try and starve you so that you will do anything for food, but we aren’t going to let that happen.

What if there is a spell placed around me that alerts her if anyone comes? I don’t want Henry to get hurt because of me.

Kieran hums.

Tell him not to come. I’ll try my hardest to not break, I say, but I sound anything but confident.

We talked about the same thing you are concerned about and he said he wanted to go even if there was. He said you have risked your life so many times and he can risk his life this time, Kieran replies. I can’t stop him now. He should be there any moment with food.

Clenching my teeth, I look through the bars to the other cell in front of me. No one is in there and part of me wishes there was so I could talk to them. But at the same time I’m glad no one is there so they don’t have to witness anything Avira is going to do to me.

“Hello?” I call out.

Are there any other cells or is it only these two?

“Who’s there?” a male voice calls back.

My eyes light up and I sit straight. “I’m from a different cell. Who are you?”

Silence.

I take a deep breath. “I’m Adeline Duvall. I think I arrived late last night.”

“Adeline?” the man sounds shocked. “Do you mean Kier⁠—”

“Don’t,” I say harshly. “I’m sorry.”

“So you are.”

“I believe we are talking about the same thing then, yes. He is someone very special to me,” I say.

I don’t know if this random man and I are even talking about the same person but it sounded too close to Kieran’s name.

“What are you doing down here? Did they find out?” the man asks.

“How did you know who I was?” I fire back.

Can I trust this man? What if I give him information and he tells Avira in the end?

“I’m a Fae. I know that there are three men that are close to him. I know that there is a guard here that has a Fae mate. They have met here before and I heard them talking about you and him,” he replies.

I don’t know why I feel like I can trust him, but I do. Something in my gut is telling me that he is okay.

“I think I know who you’re talking about,” I chuckle. “They don’t know about him.”

Does Avira have some type of spell in the dungeon so they can hear our conversation? Shit. I need to be careful.

“What did you do?” he asks. “I grabbed the whip from one of the human guards when he was whipping a female Fae while we were working.”

“I don’t know if I can talk about it,” I reply. “She’s trying to get information out of me that I can’t say. I don’t know if she can hear me right now either. But know that we are on the same side.”

I close my eyes after saying that and exhale. Those words might come and bite me in the ass, but I need him to know that I’m on his side.

“I never doubted it for a second,” he replies.

“You don’t even know me,” I chuckle.

“I’ve heard stories about you whenever those two meet. I know that you would do a lot for anyone in need. You have a good heart,” he says.

Silence fills around us.

“How long have you been here?” I finally ask after several minutes.

“Before you two met,” he replies. “I don’t know how much time has passed since I was placed in here.”

My heart aches for him. He was just trying to protect a female Fae and he ended up in the dungeon.

“We will get you out of here one day,” I promise him.

“You shouldn’t promise things when you don’t know what’s going to happen to you,” Henry says out of nowhere.

CHAPTER 5

“Iknow that my special person is going to do whatever he can to make him free,” I say confidently.

“Even if you die?” Henry asks as he steps into view.

I lock eyes with him. “Even if I die.”

“She is not going to die,” the other man says.

“It’s good to see you, Nas.” Henry looks in his direction. “I see you’ve met Adeline.”

Nas stays quiet and Henry looks back at me.

“I brought you food,” he says as he holds up a basket. “Your mother was worried that you weren’t eating well enough since you have talked about food in the palace being abnormal.”

I lick my lips at the mention of food and my stomach grumbles.

“Do prisoners get fed?” I ask.

Henry tilts his head to the side. “Sometimes.”

“Give half of it to Nas. I know it’s not enough, but some is better than none,” I tell him.

“I do not need it, Adeline,” Nas calls out. “They give me one meal a day.”

“Give him half of it.” My voice is firm.

Henry shakes his head and walks out of my line of sight. I want to be selfish and eat all of it, but I know later I’m going to feel so guilty that I ate and Nas didn’t.

“Thank you, Hi⁠—”

“Do not call her that,” Henry snaps.

“You’re welcome,” I call out. “Don’t mind Henry. Everyone is on edge right now.”

“It was my mistake,” Nas replies.

Henry walks back to my cell and opens the door with a key. He takes a couple of seconds and then enters the cell and places the basket right in front of me.

“It’s bread and some meat. It’s not a lot but you need to eat to keep your strength,” Henry explains as he pulls out some bread and meat. “I’ll slowly feed you and then I have to go.”

Henry feeds me small pieces of both, allowing me time to chew and not overwhelm my stomach.

“Remember to put up a wall. Just think about physically making the wall and after a while it will just become second nature,” Henry whispers. “When you are in pain you need to focus on the wall and nothing else. It is going to be hard, but I know you don’t want him to feel anything.”

“Thank you,” I sigh.

“I don’t know how much he will be able to handle if he can feel your pain. When I spoke to him he was not doing okay,” Henry says honestly, and lifts another bite for me to eat. “But we are going to find a way to get you out of here. We just have to be smart about it and let it be her idea.”

And we don’t know how long that’s going to take. It could be a really long time to try and convince Avira that it is her idea to let me go. If she was showing her true nature whenever she saw me, she is hard to convince, and whenever she sets her mind to something, she won’t let it go until she figures out everything.

“I need to go but I will be back later.” Henry stands up and walks out of the cell, turning the lock into place.

If only he could sneak me out of here and let me hide in the forest with the Fae. But I know Avira would search for me everywhere and destroy anything in her path.

If only everything was easy in life… then we wouldn’t be in this situation right now.

“Have you thought about telling me the truth now?” Avira asks as she walks into my cell. “Has being in the room tied to the chair taught you a lesson?”

I stay silent.

Avira hums and purses her lips. “I guess not. Part of me was hoping you had thought things through and were going to make things easy on me. The other part of me was hoping you hadn’t so I would be able to torture you.”

Biting the inside of my cheeks, I allow the pain to ground me and not say anything stupid.

Remember to put up a wall. Henry’s words flash back to me.

I close my eyes for several seconds and imagine placing each individual brick up, blocking Kieran from having access to my feelings.

“Lucky for you, I decided to bring a friend today to help me,” she says as a man walks into the room. “You’re going to get well acquainted with him if you continue to lie.”

Terror runs through me as I watch him crack his knuckles, a wicked smile plastered across his face. The muscles on his arms could crack my skull in two if he placed it in between and squeezed. Shit. Am I going to survive this?

“Do you want to reconsider telling me the truth?” she asks, cocking her head to the right.

I don’t say a word.

The right side of her lip tilts up. “I was hoping for this,” she says as she steps closer to me. “Do you know how long I have been waiting?”

She chuckles and looks over at the man in the room.

“John, you can rough her up a little and I’ll be back after I talk to the king.” Avira waves her hand in the air.

She isn’t going to stay and watch? I thought she had been waiting for this for a long time.

Avira leaves the cell, whistling as she walks down the hall. My eyes connect with John’s and I take a shaky breath in.

Wall.

While taking a deep breath I focus on the wall I have mentally placed, hoping it’s enough to keep Kieran from feeling anything from me.

“Where to start,” John mumbles as he walks around, looking me up and down.

I clench my jaw, my eyes following his every movement so I’m not caught off guard.

“Please, don’t do this,” I can’t help but plead. “I have done nothing wrong.”

He chuckles and bends down so we’re face to face. “Do you honestly think I believe you?”

“I promise I didn’t do anything wrong,” I whisper, my voice sounding frail.

“Avira thinks otherwise, and I follow her orders. She hasn’t been wrong yet.” He stands to his full height.

“Bu—”

Pain erupts on my cheek as his fist connects with my jaw, my head swinging to the side.

Adeline! Kieran yells through the bond.

Shit.

I focus everything on the wall I created, trying to push Kieran’s voice out of my mind.

Talk to me. What is going on? Why can’t I feel your emotions? he asks.

“Avira has been good to a lot of people, helping us when we needed it the most. She wouldn’t do something that wasn’t for the good of Bellhollow and its people,” John goes on. “Enough talking. She gave me a mission and I am going to execute it.”

“Adeline?” someone calls.

Groaning, I roll my head to the side and crack my eye open. Wait. Eye?

“Adeline? Are you alive?” the man calls out. “Talk to me when you wake up.”

I slowly move my hand up to my face, hissing when I touch my very swollen eye. Everything flashes before me. The countless hits I took from John before I ended up passing out from the pain.

“Adeline?” Nas calls my name again.

Humming, I stay still and look around with my good eye. I’m no longer sitting in the chair but laying on the cold, damp, and hard floor.

“I thought you had died,” he sighs. “How are you feeling?”

“Everything hurts,” I manage to get out.

Tears pool in my eyes, and this time I have no energy to stop myself from crying.

Adeline? Kieran’s gentle voice rings in my head.

Sobbing, I close my eyes and curl my body in on itself. I mentally put the block back up, not wanting Kieran to feel the sadness and how much pain I’m in right now.

Sweets, what happened? Talk to me. Kieran’s voice sounds desperate.

Nas is nice, I whisper, not wanting to talk about what happened.

How long after did John continue to beat me? Did he stop when I passed out or did he continue?

“I know everyone is worried about you, but they are also super proud of you for not giving up,” Nas says. “I know it doesn’t make the situation better, but I think it’ll help you hold on a little longer. They are no doubt thinking of every possibility to get you out of here.”

Nas is still alive? Kieran sounds shocked.

Perfect, he took the bait to switch topics.

Yes, he is. He’s in a couple cells down from me, I reply.

How are you feeling? How are you really feeling?

I clench my eyes shut and take a deep breath.

“He says hi,” I lie to Nas, trying to avoid talking to Kieran. “Was shocked to hear that you were still alive, but he is happy.”

Adeline, please don’t shut me out. I’m worried about you. I felt blinding pain in my face and then it was all gone, and before I knew it, there were dull aches all over my body before you shut me out again. What happened? How are you feeling? Kieran keeps talking.

“Tell him I said hi and can’t wait to be reunited with everyone,” Nas replies. “Now focus on talking to him. We can talk after.”

Taking a deep breath, I try to move my body to a sitting position but everything screams in protest.

Don’t move too much, Kieran says. Your body needs to heal. Just lay there and talk to me.

Nas can’t wait to be reunited with everyone. I change the topic once again.

Maybe if I change it enough times he will give up.

Adeline, stop trying to change the topic. You are making me more worried and wanting to come and get you, not caring about any of the consequences. Kieran’s voice is firm with an underlying hint of worry.

I’m sorry, I whisper.

What happened? Tell me everything.

Avira brought in a guy to rough me up a little bit so I would reconsider how I answered her questions.

Anger floods through my body.

How hurt are you? he asks.

I don’t know. My left eye is swollen shut and my whole body aches, but that is all that I know. I haven’t been able to move much since I woke up, I reply.

There is no use in trying to run away from this conversation any longer. He saw right through what I was trying to do and put a stop to it.

If you feel a little better in a couple of hours, can you check for me? Are there any spots  you have broken skin and are bleeding? Kieran asks. I can have Henry bring you some salve for your wounds so they heal faster.

I don’t know. My voice cracks as I become overwhelmed with everything he wants me to think about and do.

Shhh, you’re okay. Everything is going to be alright. We are already coming up with ideas on how to get you out of there and making it seem like it’s Avira’s idea, Kieran says. I just need you to be strong and hang in there a little longer. Do you think you can do that?

Yes, I whisper.

Such a brave girl. I’m so proud of you.

Tears spill out of my eyes at his words.

I am not going to leave you. You are my mate, my everything. We are going to get you out of there and soon, Kieran says. Trust me.

Kieran tugs on the bond and calmness spreads over my body.

Don’t hide your emotions any longer. I want to know when you are in pain so that I can be there for you.

I don’t want you to feel the pain though, I whisper.

Oh, Sweets.

“I see you’re awake.” Avira stands outside of the cell.

CHAPTER 6

“John did such a beautiful job.” She looks up and down my body. “Don’t you think?”

I just stare at her. I don’t know how much more I can take if this is what it’s going to be like every single day. I will surely die before Kieran gets me out of here.

“Don’t you think?” she questions as she grips my face.

“Yes,” I agree with her.

She lets go and I hiss as my face makes contact with the ground.

“I thought so as well. Maybe he’ll have to come again tomorrow.” She taps her chin as she looks off into the distance. “Or maybe he should come back tonight.”

“Please,” I beg.

“You know what you have to do to make this stop. Just tell me the truth and everything will go back to normal,” she says.

I close my eyes. There is no way that I can give up any information. I have held out this long and I am not going back.

“That’s fine if you don’t want to talk right now. I’m confident that after a couple more sessions with John you will be talking and won’t be able to shut up.” Avira sounds smug.

Hopefully they will get me out of here before John can come back, but deep in my gut I know that it won’t happen. It has to be calculated and her idea which could take a long time.

A burning hot sensation forms in my stomach and I wrap my arms around myself, pulling my knees up to my chest.

Adeline! Kieran yells in my head.

“I think you want to tell me the truth so badly but you don’t want to betray the person you love the most,” she says as the burning sensation continues. “Maybe slowly cooking you alive from the inside out will help incentivize you to talk quicker.”

“Avira?” someone calls.

Her eyes go wide and I look around. His voice sounds so familiar.

“Yes, Prince Archie?” Avira calls back, the pain in my stomach stopping as she turns around and walks out of the cell, locking it behind her.

“Father is looking for you,” he says.

“Let’s go to him quickly,” she rushes out, sounding almost panicked.

But why?

“Who were you talking to this time?” Prince Archie asks. “What did the person do?”

Avira holds her hands up. “No one. I was just preparing for someone that we think is going to come in soon. You never know when one of the Fae are going to break the law or keep secrets and we need to torture them a little.”

My mind spins with so many questions. Why is she lying to Prince Archie? Why does she sound almost hysterical and is trying to keep him away.

My eyes go wide.

I open my mouth but before I can say anything, my mouth shuts on its own accord and Avira glares over at me briefly.

“Let us go to your father. You know that we should not keep him waiting.” Avira starts to walk, leaving my sight.

Once their footsteps are gone, my mouth opens once more.

“Did you hear that?” I ask Nas.

“I did,” he replies.

Prince Archie doesn’t know I’m in the cell. Is Avira scared of what he’ll do if he finds out where I am? I need to tell someone that can do something. Prince Archie might be the way I can leave this cell.

Kieran? I call out his name.

Silence.

Worry bubbles inside of my stomach but I take a deep breath in and slowly let it out, trying to calm myself down. Maybe Kieran is busy with work and can’t stop to talk.

But Kieran always said he would answer me even if he was busy.

Kieran? Are you there? I ask.

“I can’t reach him,” I whisper, my chest tightening.

“Everything is going to be okay. You’ll reach him soon. He may just be busy,” Nas replies. “Just take a deep breath and slowly let it out.”

I do as he says but the feeling doesn’t go away, it festers and grows inside of me.

“Do you know what this means?” I whisper.

“That no one but a couple of people know that you are down here?” he asks.

“Exactly. There are a few people who are very important and don’t know.”

I just need Prince Archie to figure out that I’m down here and I should be free. Even though I want to stay away from Prince Archie, I know he is going to be one person who can help me. He has some strange infatuation with me and I can use it to my advantage.

Kieran? I call his name again.

Right now I wish Fae had more of their magic and I could communicate with any of them. What if something happened to Kieran and I don’t know about it? What if he is trying to get to me and has been detained?

“No,” I whisper to myself. “Don’t think that way. Nothing has happened to him.”

“That is the way you should be thinking. Think positive or else it could all crumble in front of you and you don’t need that. Everyone is safe and doing what they need to do,” Nas reassures me. “He isn’t irrational when it comes to decisions. He always thinks about it and makes sure that everyone is safe.”

“Some things have changed. He finally found me, and the way he was talking before made it seem like he would do anything, even if it meant other people were in danger,” I mumble.

Nas chuckles. “For a second I forgot who he was to you. I’m sorry you had to meet him while we are still under the curse.”

“I’m not,” I reply. “I’m glad. He has changed so much in my life and I have him to thank for it. He has helped me through so much and I am forever grate⁠—”

Adeline? Kieran finally responds.

What’s wrong? Why couldn’t I contact you? I blurt out.

The guards were walking around and we all had to stay alert. I heard you but I didn’t want to get distracted and I knew you weren’t in any new pain.

My body goes limp against the ground as the worry leaves my body. He is okay. Everyone is okay.

Are you okay? he asks.

Avira came back and tried to get me to tell the truth but I didn’t.

I’m so proud of you, he whispers.

A faint smile spreads across my face.

Why were you trying to get in contact with me? he inquires.

My eye goes wide. Oh! Henry needs to tell Prince Archie where I am!

Anger flows through the bond and I can’t help but snort.

No.

Kieran, hear me out.

No. Henry is not going to tell Prince Archie that you are there. He might be in on it and make it worse for you and for Henry. I am not going to risk him telling the prince and you getting hurt more.

That’s the thing… I don’t think Prince Archie knows that I’m here, I say.

What do you mean? Kieran asks.

Avira was just down here and Prince Archie showed up but didn’t see me. Avira was panicked. She left and stopped him from seeing who was in the cell. She lied that no one was in here. She looked almost panicked that he was about to find out, I explain. Which means Henry needs to tell Prince Archie, or someone does, and soon. He might be able to get me out of here.

And lock you up in the palace after? Kieran asks. I am not going to risk that.

He won’t. I will say that I want my mother to take care of me and that I will be able to recover better at home than at the palace. He will listen to me.

I don’t like it, Kieran mumbles.

I don’t either, but if not this then what are we going to do? How are you going to try and convince the witch to let me go when she is hellbent on keeping me here and torturing me until I die or give up the information? I ask. This may even push the wedding back a little with the bruises that I have. He will want me fully recovered before I am in front of everyone.

Silence fills the bond.

I’m going to tell Henry when he comes to see me next, I tell Kieran. She threatened to get the guy to come back today and tomorrow if I don’t start telling the truth. I honestly don’t know how much more I can go through and I don’t want to risk it. I’m not Fae. I am human.

Fine.

“Finally get in contact with him?” Nas asks.

“Yes,” I whisper. “Everything is okay. He was just busy.”

“I told you. You don’t need to think about the worst first.”

My lips twitch and I relax even more on the floor.

“Get some rest while you can. It will help you heal,” Nas says gently.

“Oh, Adeline,” someone whispers. “He told me to bring some salve but I didn’t think it was this bad.”

I hum and crack my eye open to see Henry kneeling next to me.

“Henry,” I mumble, and try to move.

“Don’t move,” he says. “Just stay right there and I will start putting salve on your cuts and bruises. You just lay there and relax.”

“I need you to do something,” I whisper as he opens the small container.

“Adeline, just rest,” he tells me.

I glare at him and he shakes his head.

“I need you to tell Pr— I hiss as he applies some salve to the area around my eye. “Gentle. Please.”

Tears pool in my right eye and I quickly blink them away, but they continue to form and before I know it they are rolling down my face.

“I’m sorry.” He looks apologetic. “I’m being as gentle as I can while I apply this. But it’s so bad.”

“I need you to tell Prin—” I start, but rear my head back as he continues to apply the salve.

“Stay still.”

“Let me get this out,” I heave as I try to fill my lungs with air. “You need to tell Prince Archie that I am in here. He will get me out of here.”

Henry’s eyes go wide and he quickly shakes his head. “No.”

Clenching my jaw, I move my hand and grip onto his arm sleeve. “You need to do it. I’ve talked to K and he understands. He knows everything. I need you to do this or else I won’t be leaving here.”

His eyes narrow on me. “You wanted to stay away from him and now you want me to go talk to him to get you out of here?”

I let go of his shirt and relax onto the ground again, my body aching from all the movement. “Just talk to K and he will tell you everything.”

I close my eye and even my breathing, done with the conversation. I can’t help but feel worried that Henry isn’t going to do it, and I’m going to end up being stuck here for weeks, months, or even years until I die.

Henry sighs. “I’ll talk to K before I do anything. Now, let’s finish putting the salve on your bruises and cuts and then I’ll feed you.”

CHAPTER 7

Aweek has passed since I last saw Henry. Every single day Avira brings John with her and leaves while he punches me, trying to get me to break.

Each time I pass out.

Each time I block Kieran from feeling my pain.

I’ve gotten better about keeping the block up, sometimes even while I’m passed out. Nas talks to me until I wake up as he has told me. He reassures me that I’m going to get out of here, but with each passing day, and with each beating, my hope grows smaller and smaller.

Did Henry talk to Kieran about telling Prince Archie? Or did he completely ignore me and move on with his life?

Kieran and I have talked briefly every day, but it’s getting less and less. It’s getting harder to contact him, his voice sounds so faint.

It feels like someone is reaching into my chest, gripping my heart, and slowly sticking their long nails in and pulling at the same time.

I’ve managed to move myself each time to a sitting position when I wake up, taking all of the strength I have.

“You’re lasting longer than I thought you would.” Avira purses her lips as she looks at me through the bars. “When are you going to give up and tell me the information that I want to know?”

I just look at her.

“I can see in your eyes that you’re going to break any minute now and I can’t wait to witness it. To see you spill all your secrets and watch everything around you crumble and not being able to do anything about it.” She smiles. “Do you want to see John later? Or maybe you want to see him twice today?”

I take a shaky breath. I can feel my body growing weaker with each beating, and my stomach aches each time I think about food.

“Or maybe we should leave you alone for a couple of days to allow your body to heal, and then come back and destroy it again,” Avira hums. “I think that would be a good thing. Give you some reprieve so that the pain is even worse. Maybe I’ll even be kind and give you some food.”

Licking my lips, I look away from Avira.

“Oh, I can see the hunger written all over your face. When everything is taken away, it makes you think real hard if the secret you’re keeping is worth it,” Avira continues. “Is it?”

Yes. It’s worth it because I’m going to make it out of here alive, and Kieran is going to find out how to break the curse. Even if I die in here, I know he will figure it out and every Fae will be free.

All worth it in my opinion.

“Or maybe I should bring in someone that you deeply care about and make you watch John hu⁠—”

“Adeline?” someone calls.

Avira’s eyes go wide, her head snapping to her left.

“Adeline, are you in here?” Prince Archie calls out.

“Prince Archie, what brings you down here?” Avira turns.

“Who are you talking to?” he asks.

“Just a Fae. You’re looking for my sister, Adeline?” Avira asks and walks forward.

“Who were you talking to just now?” Prince Archie asks again. “Was it Adeline?”

“Prince Arch—” My mouth quickly shuts, my body frozen still.

“Adeline isn’t here,” Avira chuckles. “Why would she be here? She’s back home with my mother doing chores, probably. She’s always helping her out to get things done.”

Silence fills the dungeon and I fight against her magic but I don’t budge.

“Are you sure about that? I think I just heard her voice,” Prince Archie says.

“I promise, Prince Archie,” she replies sweetly.

“So you wouldn’t mind if I looked in the cell you were just peering into?”

My heart beats faster as his footsteps start walking again. Don’t do a spell to make me disappear. Please don’t.

“Why are you curious about where my sister is?” Avira asks. “Is she hiding from you?”

“I was just at her house and her mother told me she has been at the palace for the last week and a half. But I don’t recall her moving into the castle. Then I got an anonymous letter saying she has been in the dungeon the whole time. Care to explain why I would get something like that?” Prince Archie asks. “Care to explain why my future bride is in this cell, battered and bruised?”

Tears run down my face as Prince Archie and I make eye contact. I never thought I would be so close to see him.

“Unlock this gate right now,” Prince Archie demands. “Don’t worry, Adeline. I’m going to get you out of here.”

Kieran, I’m coming home, I whisper, hoping he can hear me.

Avira glares at me while she opens the door and Prince Archie rushes to me. The magic around me leaves and I twitch my finger.

“I’m going to pick you up and take you to our wing of the palace and call the royal doctor,” Prince Archie tells me.

“I just want to go home,” I whisper, letting the tears continue to run down my face.

“You aren’t going home.”

My eyebrows bunch together in pain as I push myself to sit up straighter.

“Prince Archie, I need to go home. I will heal there with my mother taking care of me. I will feel the most comfortable there,” I try to reason with him.

“I don’t like that. You are going to stay here in the palace and heal,” he declares.

I bite my lower lip and grab onto his hand. “Please, Prince Archie. I have missed my mother and younger brother terribly. I just want to go home and be with them. I want my mother’s food.”

He peers down at our hands and lets out a sigh. “Okay, I will help you there.”

Shaking my head, I run my upper teeth against my lower lip. “I do not wish for bad rumors to spread about you if you take me back home. People will wonder if you did this to me and I would hate for that to happen. Let me go by myself and if people ask then I can say I was walking and got mugged.”

“Prince Archie, you cannot be cons—” Avira starts.

The prince holds his hands up, not looking back at Avira. “What Adeline says is very true. Even if I told them what happened, they would always second guess if I was telling them the truth.”

Yes. Continue to think this way and just let me go home by myself.

“Do you want me to send the royal doctor with you so he can check you over at your house?” Prince Archie asks.

I shake my head. “I don’t think that would be wise either. Everyone knows what the royal doctor looks like,” I lie.

But he sure would stick out like a sore thumb if he came into our town. Everyone would know he came from the palace, and if he was seen with me the rumors would spread.

“No one from the palace can come with me. I don’t want you or your father to get a bad name if people start talking about you guys doing this to me. It’s better if I go alone so that I can control what comes out and lead them toward me getting mugged instead,” I explain, my ribs aching with how much I’m talking.

He looks up and down my body. “Will you be able to walk back to your house?”

With enough grit and breaks.

“Yes,” I whisper. “You can even have one of your guards in the town keep an eye on me from a distance and watch me go into my house.”

He hums. “I like that idea. They will come and report to me after they see you enter your house. Do not go anywhere else.”

“Prince Archie.” Avira steps into the cell.

“You and I will be talking to my father about this.” He stands up and looks at her over his shoulder. “Let me help you up and guide you out of the palace.”

Every muscle in my body screams at me as Prince Archie grabs under my arms and slowly lifts me up. Heaving, I close my eyes tightly, trying to fight off the swimming vision threatening to send me to the ground.

How am I going to make it to the house in this condition?

“P-Prince Archie,” I hesitantly say as I look over at him.

“Yes, Adeline.” He steadies me.

Tears pool in my eyes from all of the pain. I look down at my body and back at him.

“I don’t—” I take a deep breath.

“It's okay, you can tell me anything and I won’t get mad,” he reassures me. “Please, do not cry. Whatever you have to say I know you are very concerned about, but you don’t have to be that way with me. I will take care of you and make sure that you have everything you need.”

A little happiness blooms inside of me when he thinks the tears are out of fear.

Perfect.

“I don’t know if the wedding can happen on time,” I whisper and grip onto his arms. “I don’t know if my body will be fully recovered and looking okay by then.”

Prince Archie gently cups my face with his hands, missing all the bruises. “Do not even think about the wedding right now. I will talk to my father about postponing it until you are fully recovered. You just focus on healing right now.”

“Thank you.” I force a smile on my face.

“Anything for my future bride. Now, let us get you out of here.”

Hissing, I pull my foot back as pain spreads across like a million needles being inserted into my foot at once.

“Are you alright?” Prince Archie asks.

“She is perfectly fine. You don’t need to hold onto her arm like she is going to fall over,” Avira sneers, rolling her eyes at me.

“Avira, enough,” Prince Archie snaps. “Guards, please take her to the throne room but do not allow her to talk to my father.”

“Prince Archie, you cannot be serious,” Avira scoffs.

“Dead serious,” he replies before turning to me.

Two guards latch onto Avira’s arms and drag her away as she yells at Prince Archie the whole time.

“Are you ready to try again?” he asks.

Nodding, we carefully walk down the hallway, passing Nas’s cell. I turn my head slightly and make eye contact with him.

“Thank you,” I barely whisper. “I won’t forget that you’re in here.”

He nods and smiles. It takes forever for Prince Archie to help me up the stairs and to the entrance of the palace before we stop walking and face each other.

“I’m sorry this happened to you,” Prince Archie says. “I will be talking to my father about your sister and what she has done.”

“Thank you,” I hesitantly reply.

I don’t know why Prince Archie is being so nice to me right now when he has never been the whole time that I have known him. Is he planning something? Am I going to owe him later?

Don’t think about that right now.

Right now I need to focus on getting back to the house before it gets dark. 

“I will check up on you in a couple of days,” Prince Archie informs me. “Rest, and if you need anything, let me know.”

Not going to happen.

CHAPTER 8

Ican’t help but look over my shoulder every couple minutes, waiting for Avira to come out at any second and drag me back into the cell. She was not happy that Prince Archie took me out, and I just know she’s going to try again.

Kieran? I call out, hoping since I’m closer to town he will be able to hear me clearer.

Silence.

My throat gets tight and I push all the bad thoughts to the back of my mind. There is no way Avira found out who Kieran is to me. There is no way she has done something to him.

He will reply to me when he has time and when I’m back in my house.

“Adeline!” someone yells.

My head jerks to the right, eyes wide as I try to find the person.

“What happened to you?” My mother rushes toward me. “Are you okay?”

Everyone looks toward me and I lower my head, not wanting to see their reactions. I haven’t even been able to look at myself, but with how I feel I know that I look like an absolute wreck.

“Oh baby,” Mother whispers, her voice full of emotion. “Let’s get you home where you can sit down. Take your time. Don’t worry. I’ve got you.”

She carefully wraps her arms around my waist and helps me walk all the way back to the house. I can’t help but look over to the forest where the Fae are. Their mouths hang open as they look at me and I continue to scan their faces, trying to find Kieran.

Everett’s face is blank when I make eye contact with him, but he gives me a little nod before turning around and walking into the forest. What was that?

“Have you fallen behind on chores?” I ask as we get closer to the house.

Whispers are heard all around us as we walk past the townspeople.

“Margo, what happened to Adeline?” one of Mother’s friends asks.

“I don’t know.” Mother’s voice cracks.

I look over at the lady. “I got mugged when I was walking back from another town. They took everything.”

The lady gasps, her hands flying to her mouth. “And they did that to you?”

“I fought for a while since the spices and cloth were precious and cost a lot of money,” I trail off at the end.

“Adeline,” my mother scolds me. “I told you never to fight them. We can always make up the loss.”

Guilt festers inside me as they believe my lie. For now they need to believe it like I promised the prince they would. When Mother and I are in the comfort of our own home I can tell her the truth.

Wait.

She still thinks that Avira is her daughter. How is she going to take something like this? Will Mother even believe me if I tell her?

“I’m going to get her home so she can rest and recuperate. If you need anything, we will be closed today and probably tomorrow while I take care of her,” Mother gently tells her friend.

“Do you need me to get you anything?” she asks.

“No, thank you, but I will let you know if that changes,” Mother replies.

We start walking again and I look over at the Fae one more time. They’re still staring at me. I can’t read any of their facial expressions as they look up and down my body. Do they know what happened to me?

“Look ahead so you don’t trip,” Mother reminds me. “You don’t need to hurt your body even more than it already is.”

“I’m sorry,” I mumble.

“We will talk when we get into the house.” Her words are final.

“Henry?” I can’t help but ask.

“He said he was told to stay at our house to watch over until you came back. At least that is what he said the prince told him,” she whispers.

When did Henry tell Prince Archie about where I was? What was Prince Archie told while I was gone?

So many questions run through my head, giving me a headache. I take it in a slow breath and let it out, trying to calm myself down. Everything will get answered eventually and I just need to be patient. Right now I need to focus on getting better and then everything else comes after.

Thankfully we already have the book and the Fae are looking into it. Now I can really focus on getting better and not worry about the timeline and everything getting closer.

“Do you want to lay in bed or sit in the chair?” Mother asks as we get closer to the house.

“Chair first. I would like something to drink,” I reply.

When was the last time I ate or drank something? The last time Henry came to give me food and put the salve on my face… which didn’t do much at all. If anything it gave John more incentive to hit me and leave marks since I was healing.

“Adeline, I heard the prince found you,” Henry says as he bows slightly.

“Thank you,” I whisper.

His eyebrows pull together before guilt is written all over his face. “I’m sorry that it took me so long. I was not able to meet with K to verify everything you said until just recently.”

“H-how is he do—” I stop myself from finishing the sentence.

My eyes scan the surroundings before finding their way back to Henry. I need to be careful what I say out loud, and I also need to be patient. Kieran will contact me when he can.

But there is a small sliver of doubt that something isn’t right. That something is wrong with him and I need to go find out where he is.

“He is doing okay. Worried about you since he couldn’t get in contact with you, but no doubt they have already gone to him to tell him you’re home,” Henry replies.

“Thank you,” I whisper.

“Come on, Adeline. Let’s get you inside and sitting,” Mother says.

She helps me into the house and into one of the chairs. I could pass out right here and be perfectly content.

“What actually happened?” Mother asks as she sets a warm cup of tea in front of me.

“Please keep an open mind when I tell you everything,” I start off.

Mother nods and I explain everything from the beginning.

“I’m going to need time to process everything you just told me,” Mother whispers as she looks down at her hands.

I place my empty cup on the table. “I understand. It was a lot for me to come to terms with.”

Silence fills between us.

“I’m going to go lay down,” I tell her.

Everything screams at me as I push myself up from the chair.

“I’ll wake you up for dinner,” Mother says as I walk slowly toward my room.

I don’t even change out of my dirty clothes before I lay down on my bed, closing my eyes and falling asleep.

Adeline? Kieran’s voice barely wakes me up.

I hum back, exhaustion weighing me down.

I was getting worried when I couldn’t reach you through the bond.

Tired, I mumble.

Sweets, are you ok— But I get pulled back under.

Sweets, just say one word so I know you’re alive, Kieran whispers. Please.

Kieran, I say, my voice sounding groggy.

I’m still so exhausted, but more coherent than the last time Kieran tried to talk to me. Did he really try to talk to me earlier or was that just a dream?

Oh, Sweets. I was so worried when you didn’t reply earlier after saying you were tired. I’m so glad you’re alive. Kieran sounds relieved. How are you feeling?

Tired. Everything hurts, I reply.

Everett said he saw you come home. He also told me what you looked like. I told you not to block your emotions from me when you were in there. Why did you? he asks.

I didn’t want you to feel the pain I was going through and feel guilty or like it was your fault, I say, fully awake now.

How long has it been since I fell asleep?

Sweets.

I know you are already feeling guilty and like it is your fault, I assume. Because that’s how I felt whenever we got caught and you got separated from our people. But I don’t want you to feel any of those emotions, so I hid my pain so you didn’t have to feel it.

And so you wouldn’t come barging into the castle without thinking anything through and getting captured. If both of us were in the dungeon then who would take care of the people? There are only so many deals I can make with people to get Kieran out of a situation before it looks like I have a connection with him.

I don’t want you to ever do that again, he says.

Hopefully there isn’t a next time.

“Adeline, it’s time to—” Mother stops as she walks into my room. “Oh, you’re finally awake. I was worried you were never going to wake up.”

My eyebrows scrunch together. “How long has it been?”

“You missed dinner and now it’s time for breakfast,” she replies. “After I couldn’t wake you up last night for dinner I didn’t try again. Figured you needed all the rest you could get and would wake up sometime today.”

That’s why Kieran was getting so worried. I fell asleep way before dinner and he couldn’t contact me for several hours.

“Let’s help get you up to the table to eat, and after that we can get you washed and into new clothes,” Mother says gently.

“I don’t want to,” I mumble.

I know the warm water will feel good against my bruises and cuts, but it’s going to take so much energy and I don’t have the strength for that right now.

“I borrowed a big bucket from our neighbor so you can lay in it and soak in the warm water to help with all the cuts and your muscles,” Mother explains. “I have some herbs as well to help. You don’t have to do any work. While you are soaking in the bucket, I will wash your hair with the other water.”

Tears brim my eyes as we walk to the table.

“Shhh, I know. Everything is going to be alright,” Mother coos as she helps me sit down. “I want you to eat all of this slowly.”

She places a big bowl of porridge in front of me, steaming from how hot it is.

Mother chuckles. “I did make it hotter so it would force you to eat slowly. I don’t know when you ate last but I don’t want you getting sick by eating too fast.”

Of course she would think about something like that.

“Thank you,” I whisper.

CHAPTER 9

“How does the temperature of the water feel?” Mother asks after several minutes.

“A little too hot, but my body will get used to it. Thank you again,” I say.

Sweets, are you okay? I feel that you’re in pain, Kieran’s slightly panicked voice comes through.

I can’t help but smile at his concern. Will I ever get used to how worried he gets about me?

I’m soaking in hot water, I reply.

Good. I was going to suggest you find a way to do that, He says. I wish I had my powers so that I could heal you fully and you didn’t have to go through all of this.

That reminds me, are you any closer to figuring out how to break the curse? I ask.

No, we haven’t figured anything else out. It is in a language we have not seen in a very long time.

I can’t help but feel disappointed. It’s been almost two weeks since I gave the book to Kieran and they haven’t made any progress. Will they be able to figure anything out before I have to marry the prince?

Don’t worry, Sweets. We are actively working on it all throughout the day. We are going to figure out how to break the curse soon, I promise, he tries to reassure me.

I believe in you guys, I mumble.

“Adeline? Are you there?” Mother asks.

“Yes?” I open my eyes and look at her.

“I’ve been calling your name for a while now and you weren’t answering me. For a second I thought you had fallen asleep.”

“Sorry.” I bow my head. “I was deep in thought.”

Before I got taken I was good at being able to listen and reply to Kieran while also listening to the people around me.

“You used to get that look when you talked to your mate.” Mother chuckles. “But this time was a little different, almost like you were there with him and not here.”

“It felt normal,” I reply.

I want to see you soon, Kieran says. I want to see you with my own eyes to see if you are okay and healing.

“Is it alright if I wash your hair now?” she asks. “You can scootch down and lay your head against the side of the bucket.”

I do what she says and close my eyes.

“I might fall asleep,” I mumble.

“If you do, I will wake you up before the water gets cold,” she says softly. “You just relax and let me take care of you.”

I don’t know if I will be able to make it to the forest with how my body is right now, I reply. I also don’t know if I want you to see me right now with how I look. It’s not a pretty sight.

I don’t know if I will be able to look him in the eyes and see his reaction. What if he sees me and wants me to leave right away?

Sweets, you will not run me off with how you look. If anything it might make me want to kidnap you so that I can take care of you myself, making sure you are healing properly and have everything that you want, Kieran replies.

Warm water is gently poured over my head and I sigh.

“Feels amazing,” I mumble.

“We can do this tomorrow if you want as well,” Mother offers.

“That will be a lot of water wasted.”

“Adeline, it will not. It will help you heal and that is what’s important right now,” she scolds. “And besides, the Fae has been fetching the water every single day. I can let him know that we will need a lot more tomorrow. He won’t complain.”

“Because he can’t,” I chuckle.

“Because he cares about you. I didn’t realize how important you were to them until you were gone. I knew something was wrong when the Fae came over every day to help out with chores and the worried look he always wore. Even though Henry told me that you were fine, seeing the Fae worried made me realize that I wasn’t getting told the truth,” she explains. “And he was the one that suggested I borrow the bucket and give you warm baths before you were even home.”

“Wh-what?” I tilt my head back to look her in the eyes. “He suggested it?”

“He did. He said he didn’t know when you would be home but that warm baths help heal the body and helps you relax. I didn’t know what he was talking about at the time but he was right,” she says as she shakes her head. “Enough about this. I’m going to start washing your hair. If it hurts too much you let me know and I will be gentler.”

I close my eyes as my mother starts running her hands through my hair, my mind spiraling with so many different thoughts about Elias and the other Fae.

But I know I won’t be able to see you for a little while. I do not want you exerting yourself too much while you;re trying to recover from what you went through. When you are healed and can walk without pain, that is when we will meet, Kieran tells me.

I don’t know if I can wait that long, I mumble. I was thinking until I can get up without being in so much pain that I want to pass out.

Adeline.

Yes? I ask hesitantly.

Are you still hiding some of your pain and emotions from me? he asks.

I don’t think so, I say, unsure.

I focus on the wall in my mind and realize that it’s half up.

I guess I got so good at keeping it partially up that it was up without me even thinking about it, I explain.

Take it down. I don’t want you to hide it just like I don’t hide it from you.

Guilt festers inside me. Even though I know I was hiding it to keep him safe and sane, I still feel bad about it. He told me that he would never hide his emotions or pain from me and yet I did it to him.

I think about taking the wall down between us.

I’m sorry. I just wanted to protect you, I mumble. I know we said we wouldn’t put a wall up, but I didn’t want you to come to me when you realized how much pain I was in. I was worried that you would get captured and die.

I know what you were trying to do and I don’t want you to do it again. I forgive you for doing it this time, but never again.

Never again.

Hopefully I can actually keep this promise.

Sweets, how are you still awake with how much pain you’re in? Kieran asks.

I don’t know. I passed out several times when it was all going on and I slept for almost a full day, I reply. But the warm water is helping right now to ease all of it. I don’t really notice the pain unless I’m moving.

Which is why I’m trying not to move much so I don’t feel it. The less I move, the better.

When the curse is broken, she is going to regret ever doing that. The man that did it will also regret ever laying a finger on you, Kieran growls. Everyone who has wronged you will pay for it.

Calm down. While I do agree with you on the people who really did me harm, the people who didn’t do much don’t deserve it. Are you going to go after the person who didn’t pay us for our work? I ask.

If you want me to… I will.

No, Kieran.

I have no problem going to anyone and making them right the wrong that they did. No matter how small it is, he says. You just need to say the word and I will.

Kieran, I don’t want you to go after that person. I don’t like the thought of you going after the man that hit me, but I know you will regardless of what I say. But the other people who didn’t pay something or did something minor, I don’t want you to go after them. My mother and I have already forgotten about what they did, I say.

Fine, but if you ever change your mind, I don’t mind going after them.

What am I going to do with you? I sigh.

Keep me. Love me. Take care of me. Spend the rest of your life with me.

“Is everything okay between you two?” Mother asks.

“He just wants to go after people and I’m trying to stop him,” I reply without thinking.

My eyes widen, and I tilt my head back, locking eyes with Mother.

She smiles softly. “Just like how your father and I were. He wanted to go after everyone that wronged us and I managed to hold him back so he didn’t end up in prison for his whole life or get banished to Tarravega.”

“He, what?” I whisper.

That is something I didn’t know about my father. Was he really driven for revenge on people that did wrong toward anyone he loved?

Mother continues to massage my head as she talks. “He had a couple Fae friends that he saw when he went hunting and knew things that most people don’t. He didn’t like the injustice everyone was getting and wanted to get back for everyone that had been done wrong. I stopped him several times from hurting a guard or going after the prince when he walked through town. He wanted life to be fair for everyone as much as it could be. He wanted the Fae not to be slaves anymore but free like they were all those years ago.”

“That’s why you weren’t shocked when I told you things,” I whisper more to myself as it dawns on me.

I always wondered why she didn’t panic when I talked about the Fae and having some friends. I thought she just panicked in private and wanted to be calm in front of me so I wouldn’t bottle everything up.

She hums. “Correct. You are so much like your father.”

Tears sting my eyes and I quickly close them and relax into the water. Who did father know of the Fae?

“Did he ever say the names of the people he knew?” I can’t help but ask.

“He didn’t. Your father was just as paranoid as you are when you talk about them. He didn’t know if there was anyone listening and always made sure it sounded like he was talking about his hunting friends so if anyone overheard they didn’t find him suspicious,” Mother explains.

Sighing, I hum, my mind whirling with so many different questions. I know Kieran knew my father from years ago when they crossed paths, but have I met my father’s other Fae friends?

“Why don’t you ask your mate when you see him next?” mother asks quietly. “I bet he has the knowledge of who your father was friends with, and if he doesn’t he can surely ask.”

“I think I will,” I say.

Are you going to ignore what I just said? Kieran asks.

The corner of my lips turn upward. If Kieran had it his way we would talk all the time so there would never be a moment of silence. I want the same, but being so far apart and having to concentrate on what is going on in front of me and what he is saying is hard, and I can’t do it without giving away that I’m occupied.

I was talking to my mother, I reply.

About me? I can hear the smirk in his voice.

Yes.

Hmm, do I want to know what you two were talking about? he asks.

Just how similar you are to my father with wanting revenge on people.

It won’t ever change. If you want me to go after someone, you let me know.

Thank you, I mumble.

Anything for you, Sweets. Now, get some rest.

CHAPTER 10

Several days have passed since I got released from the dungeon and my body is taking its sweet time healing. Mother has confined me to either laying on my bed or sitting at the table, not to do much at all. Though I can’t argue too much since I don’t really want to do anything right now. With every single movement I make, my whole body aches with pain.

“Your face is looking a lot better. Did you put the salve on it this morning?” Mother asks as she walks into the kitchen, holding the baby.

“Yes, I did. I’m hoping I can go out soon and walk around to slowly get my body used to movement again,” I say.

“Why don’t you do that here where you’re safe?” Mother suggests. “I would hate for you to go out there and people whisper and come up with rumors about what happened to you.”

“I already told someone that I was mugged on my way back from Hellhollow,” I sigh. “I told the prince that I would come up with some believable excuse so that he wasn’t dragged into it.”

“Why would you do that?” Mother asks as she starts feeding the baby.

“Because it was the only way that I could come home without him… the only way I was able to come home at all. He wanted me to stay in the palace until I was fully healed, but I didn’t want to be there when Avira was there. She could come to me at any moment and hurt me.”

She could still come to me now with her powers and do anything she wanted. No one is safe from her.

“I guess coming up with a believable lie is better than getting stuck in the palace. He probably wouldn’t have let you go after you had stayed there for a while,” Mother points out.

I hum in agreement. “I was worried about that. I also didn’t know if they would do anything to prolong my healing so I was there longer. I knew if I came home that I would heal the best.”

I would also be at peace and not worry about what I say or do in the palace. I shudder at the thought of living there with the prince, never having a moment of peace and always having to be on guard. There is no way I would survive there.

With how Prince Archie is always acting around me, I wouldn’t put it past him to do something with my healing and have someone follow me around to spy on me. He’s paranoid, and not in a good way.

“We won’t let that happen.” Mother gently pats my hand. “You aren’t going to live there.”

Not with Prince Archie. But if Kieran and the Fae can break the curse then maybe some day I will live there, with him. But would he want to live there after everything that has happened?

“Do you think I would be able to go out and walk around today?” I ask.

I’m itching to go out into the forest and see Kieran. It’s been forever since I last saw him and the longer I go without it, the more I’m on edge.

Mother looks at my face for several seconds. “If you cover your face, then yes. I don’t have anything to cover up the bruises, though.”

I close my eyes and lean my head back, taking a deep breath. I don’t have anything either since I used it up the last time something like this happened.

“What if I put a scarf around my neck and keep my head tilted down?” I suggest after a couple of seconds.

“And look suspicious so people draw their attention to you?” Mother chuckles. “You would be better off just walking out there with nothing at all.”

“Then I will,” I declare.

Mother shakes her head. “Do you want the prince to know that you’re doing better?” she asks. “Do you want him to know that the wedding can still proceed like usual?”

“He told me that they are going to push the wedding back since he wants my scars to fully heal and the whole situation not be the talk of the town. The wedding dress is going to be super heavy and I won’t be able to wear it and walk down the aisle like he wants me to,” I explain. “My whole body is weak and I can’t do much right now.”

Prince Archie didn’t actually say they were going to push the wedding back, but he told me not to worry about it. Next time I see him I’m going to have to explain that it should be pushed back so people don’t get the wrong idea.

“Really?” Mother arches an eyebrow.

I nod. “It would only take one small rumor to turn the tide. The wedding will be too close to what happened to me and people might get the wrong idea about the prince. He wouldn’t want that.”

Mother shakes her head and starts burping the baby. “You have everything figured out.”

I shrug. “Not everything. There wasn’t much I could do when I was laying in my bed.”

But even if I didn’t spread the small rumor, I bet someone else in town would have the same idea as me. Some of them already suspect that it’s the Prince and not the story I came up with. If any of them were paying attention to what direction I was coming from, they would know that what I said was a lie.

I hadn’t thought of that small detail until it was too late. But there was no way for me to go around town and come from the direction of Hellhollow without being spotted by someone.

“I think I want to go outside and try to walk around,” I whisper.

“I can’t stop you from going out, but if you do, just be careful. Don’t overwork yourself and be safe,” she says. “And make sure to take a guard with you. Preferably Henry if he is still here.”

“I will.” I give her a small smile.

I don’t think I would want to walk outside of the house without Henry or a different guard with me. What if Avira shows up again and wants to take me back? At least if I have Henry with me he would help me stay away from her.

I push myself up from the chair, biting the inside of my cheeks as everything screams at me to sit back down and rest. But I can’t.

I need to see Kieran.

Please tell me you are free and can meet me in the forest, I mumble through the bond.

I don’t know what I’m going to do if he says he can’t see me.

Is everything okay? Kieran asks.

I just need to see you. I don’t think I can go another day without seeing you in person, I whisper, feeling absolutely pathetic.

Whenever he was locked away I never had these feelings. Sure, I wanted to see him and wanted to get him out, but this time is different.

Maybe it’s because I know who the witch is now and everything is becoming more dangerous. She can manipulate anyone into thinking anything and I can’t. She could turn everyone against me and there is nothing I would be able to do.

Tell me when you are in the forest and I will come and see you, Kieran replies.

My shoulders drop and I look over at Mother. “I’m going to go out now. There will be less people right now. I won’t be long, I promise.”

“Take your time.” She smiles. “I know he won’t let you do anything that will put too much strain on your body. He’ll have you sitting down before you even get to say hi to him.”

I chuckle. “He isn’t like that. He cares but he won’t make me sit before I can say hi.”

Mother smirks and waves her hand in the air, dismissing me. I slowly make my way to the front door, opening it and seeing Henry leaning up against the wall.

“I thought all guards were supposed to stand tall at all times, but I’ve caught you several times leaning against the wall. Doesn’t that make people less intimidated by you?” I ask as I step outside.

The weather is slowly getting warmer with each day passing. Winter is almost over and excitement bubbles inside me. Soon I will be able to go out and walk around without worrying about getting frostbite and almost dying.

“The other guards do, but I do not,” he replies. “Everyone knows who I am and are afraid of me.”

My eyebrows raise. “I don’t think that is the case.”

“Before I was assigned to guard you, I was out punishing people for wrongdoings. Everyone knows who I am and what I look like. Why do you think no one really comes close to you now?” Henry asks.

I mull over everything he says as we walk toward the forest, incredibly slow compared to all the other times.

“You probably figured it was because the guard activity also increased and rumors about you spread?” Henry continues to walk, matching my pace. “That was part of the reason, but rumors die down after a while and they still don’t come close to you, do they? And then once they figured out who you were to the Prince, it all changed again.”

“Were you really killing people?” I ask, stopping and heaving in breaths.

At this rate we are never going to get to the forest to see Kieran. I scan around the town, my eyes stopping on where the Fae are. Several of them are watching me, worry written all over their faces.

Standing up straighter, I smile and turn to Henry. “Let’s get out of here before they say something to him.”

But I already know they are sending messages to Kieran to let him know how I look. Elias told me they like to keep Kieran informed when he is not close to the town where he can see me. Did they just randomly start doing it or did Kieran tell them to?

I push the thought to the back of my mind and start to walk once again.

“Is everything okay with you and them?” Henry asks.

“Why wouldn’t it be?” I ask instead of answering his question.

“Because you don’t want them to tell him anything. Are you trying to hide something?” Henry keeps prying.

I stop in my tracks and turn to Henry, annoyed. “I am not trying to hide anything.”

That is a lie. I don’t want the other Fae to tell Kieran how I am really doing. I want to pretend like I am better than I actually am so he doesn’t worry about me too much and doesn’t get so angry that he goes after the witch and dies.

No.

That can’t happen.

“Lies. Everyone knows what you are going to do,” Henry chuckles.

I glare at him before walking again. “They do not.”

“You are going to try and hide from Kieran that you’re in pain. You’re going to try and play it off like you aren’t hurt anymore,” Henry explains exactly what I was going to try and do.

“How did you know?” I mumble.

“Because anyone in your situation would do it for someone they love. You don’t want him to worry about you. The other Fae probably know that but they are going to tell him anyway. You are the High Lady and they care for you,” he replies.

Clenching my fists, I look ahead of me and stay silent. I thought I was going to be good at hiding it from everyone.

“There’s no hope that he doesn’t know about it, right?” I ask as we enter the forest.

“They probably already told him. And if he asks, don’t lie to him.” Henry gives me a pointed look.

I stay silent.

“I’m serious, Adeline. Don’t lie to him if he asks about it. Tell him the truth. He wants to know about everything just like you want to know about everything. Think of you being in his place and him lying to you about how he was truly feeling,” Henry continues.

“Okay. Okay. I get it,” I sigh.

Henry and I stop in the middle of the clearing, my breathing heavy. How was I able to do this before and not be out of breath? How did me getting beat for a couple of weeks change so much?

“Have a seat, Sweets.” Kieran appears right in front of me.

CHAPTER 11

Iguess my mother was right that Kieran would tell me to sit down before I could even say hi.

“I’ll be talking to my mate,” Henry says and walks off.

“Did they tell you anything?” I ask and sigh as I sit down.

“The other Fae?” Kieran cocks his head to the side.

“I’m assuming since you know who I’m talking about that they have already told you what they saw,” I whisper, and lean so I’m lying on the ground.

So much for trying to keep it from him.

“What did they see?” He lays right next to me.

“How slow I was to get to the forest,” I reply, deciding to tell him since they already told him. “That I had to stop and was out of breath.”

“They actually didn’t tell me that,” he replies.

My eyes pop open and I look over at him. “Wh-what? You didn’t know?”

He shakes his head. “They hadn’t told me anything yet.”

“But… but I thought by the way you reacted that they had,” I mumble.

“No, they haven’t.”

“But—” I stop myself. “Why didn’t you stop me?”

“You just assumed they had told me when I asked if it was the Fae,” he replies.

“Because you sounded so confident,” I whine. “I wouldn’t have told you if I knew they hadn’t said anything to you.”

I close my eyes and take a deep breath. So much for trying to keep it a secret from him.

Kieran moves and cups my face with his hands. “I don’t want you to keep anything from me, do you understand?”

I crack my eyes open and look up at him. “I understand. I just didn’t want you to worry about me. I was trying to make sure that you were at ease.”

“One thing you should know is I will not be at ease right now. I know you are in pain. I don’t even have to feel what you are going through to know that. Our people described what you looked like to me, and from that alone we all know that you were in a lot of pain,” Kieran explains.

“I almost passed out several times,” I mumble.

“And I’m proud that you pushed through it and made it safely back to your house. And I wish I could go back in time and tell you not to go get the book if I knew this was going to be the result,” he says.

“Then you wouldn’t have the book and we wouldn’t be close to figuring out how to break the curse. No one else would have been able to get the book but me,” I tell him.

“Even so, I wouldn’t have allowed you to do it if I knew you would be tortured for weeks. I would rather spend eternity being a slave than allow you to go through that,” he whispers.

“But I don’t want you to be a slave. I don’t want you to not have your powers or never be able to fly again. I want you to have all of that back. I want everyone to be equal and no one get hurt,” I say. “I know you don’t care, but I do.”

“It’s not that I don’t care,” he replies.

“That was the wrong word on my part. You don’t want me to get hurt and would sacrifice not having the cure so that I wouldn’t. If me going through all of that allows for you guys to be free soon, I would do it over and over,” I tell him honestly. “It wouldn’t cross my mind to not go through all of that.”

Kieran closes his eyes and places his forehead against mine. “What did I do to deserve you?” he whispers.

“I should be the one saying that,” I mumble back.

Kieran chuckles and lies back down, pulling me closer to him. I snuggle into his side and fully relax against him.

“How are you feeling?” Kieran asks after several minutes. “I could feel how anxious you were this morning before you contacted me.”

“I just needed to see you. I was getting worried and just needed to see you to make sure that you were okay,” I mumble into his chest. “I don’t know why.”

“That’s okay,” he coos.

I want to ask him how it’s going with figuring out how to break the curse, but I don’t want to ruin the mood. They have been working on it and I know if they found anything Kieran would tell me right away.

“Prince Archie said that I don’t have to worry about the wedding right now,” I whisper. “I think it’s going to get postponed with how small and weak I’ve gotten.”

“Good. That gives us more time to figure out how to break the curse.” Kieran kisses my forehead. “I’m sorry you had to go through that.”

“It’s okay, I don’t hold it against you.” I pat his chest. “I will never hold it against you. You warned me several times and I knew the risks. So I don’t want you to feel bad any longer, understand?”

“Yes, Sweets,” he chuckles. “It’s easier said than done but I will try my best.”

“Good. Now, when the curse is broken the first thing I want is to walk around town with you, holding hands,” I declare.

“And the second?” he asks.

“I want you to meet my mother. I also want you to cook me a meal, something that I’ve never had before. I want you to show me everywhere you went when you were a kid and tell me stories. I want to meet our people here officially and the people behind the wall. I want to do a lot of things,” I ramble on.

“And we are going to make it all happen, but over time. I don’t want to tire you out in the very beginning. We have our whole lives ahead of us once the curse is broken and don’t need to rush anything,” he says gently.

I sigh. “Fine. I was hoping we would be able to do it in the first couple of days and then slowly do it all over again but I guess I can wait.”

Kieran chuckles. “None of those things will happen in the very beginning after the curse is broken. We will have to get everyone used to the Fae not having the curse over them. Remember, everyone has been taught that we are the bad people and it will take a while for them to adjust to everything. Some of those things we may have to wait half a year or longer.”

Groaning, I look at him. “I don’t want to have to wait that long.”

“But we are going to have to. I don’t want you to get hurt if people retaliate. I don’t want to get hurt if we are walking down the street,” Kieran says softly. “It’s all going to work out, don’t worry. Maybe they will all see that the Fae aren’t bad, but until then I don’t want you saying anything when we break the curse, understand? Not until we know that it’s safe and you and your family won’t be targeted.”

“I understand. You don’t have to worry.”

“I will always worry about you. Even when you are safe, I will always worry.” He runs his hands through my hair.

“Worry about what?”

“Worry that you may not be eating on time or getting enough sleep. Worry that you would be missing me too much and try to do something reckless to come and see me. There are so many things that run through my mind when it comes to you and I wouldn’t have it any other way.”

Tears prickle my eyes and I blink, clearing them. I had no idea Kieran was that worried about me.

“I didn’t know you worried so much about me,” I mumble. “I feel bad that I don’t think about whether you have eaten all the time. It crosses my mind sometimes when I’m eating and I look outside. I do wonder if you are warm enough out in your tent and then I remember that you didn’t have a shirt on in the dead of winter when you were carrying me.”

“You have your own way of worrying for me. You don’t need to do the exact same thing as I do. You are also busier than me recently and have had a lot on your mind. It’s only natural that you don’t think about anything else,” he says. “I don’t expect to be on your mind at all times and I don’t want you to feel bad if I say that you are on mine. Understand?”

I nod and lean my head on his chest, taking a deep breath and letting it out. Kieran always knows what to say to make everything all better.

“I have to be honest about something. When the spell is broken, you won’t be leaving my side for a while,” Kieran says.

“Good.” I tighten my arms around him. “I don’t want you to leave my side either.”

“Good. I’m glad we are on the same page.”

“I think on this matter we will always be on the same page,” I chuckle. “We both can’t be with each other except for a couple of minutes each week and it’s created this tension and need between us.”

“Need, you say.” Kieran’s grip tightens around my waist.

I slap his chest and chuckle. “Now is not the time.”

“I would never dare do it while you’re hurt.” Kieran kisses the top of my head.

“Adeline, it’s time to go,” Henry says, interrupting our conversation.

I groan and grip onto Kieran’s shirt tighter. “I don’t want to leave.”

“And soon you won’t have to, but right now you and I need to go back before people get suspicious. You are hurt and they know that,” Henry explains. “You don’t want to put yourself on the prince’s radar.”

Kieran moves his body and picks me up before standing, gently placing me on my feet.

“Steady?” he asks me.

“Yes,” I mumble, and he lets me go.

“We can still talk every day. I know it’s not the same, but soon we won’t have to hide that we are together. I just need you to be patient for a little longer,” Kieran says as he runs his thumb across my cheek. “Can you do that for me?”

“Yes,” I reply. “Though I’m about done being patient,” I mumble.

Kieran chuckles and pulls me into his embrace, kissing my forehead before turning to Henry. “Keep an eye on her. You know who the witch is. Do not let anyone near her that you do not know and trust.”

“Yes, Kieran.” Henry bows.

“Now, go before people start suspecting things and talking.” Kieran smiles gently.

“Bye,” I whisper.

Kieran waves and Henry and I start walking away, my heart aching with each step I take away from him.

“It’s going to get better soon,” Henry says.

CHAPTER 12

“Avira wants to see you,” Henry tells me after I open the door.

My face drains of color as I stare at him.

“No,” I whisper, taking a stuttering step back.

Everything flashes before my eyes as those words keep repeating in my head. Avira wants to see me again. Is she going to whisk me away and torture me again? Will she get to me before Henry can save me?

“The prince has granted her permission to talk to you with me present. You get to pick the place, but we need to go there now and tell another guard to tell your sister where,” Henry explains.

“What’s going on?” Mother asks as she steps behind me. “Are you okay? Adeline, talk to me.”

“Av-Av—” I can’t bring myself to say her name out loud.

“Avira wants to talk to her and the prince has said it’s okay as long as I’m there,” Henry fills in for me.

“No. I will not allow her to see Adeline,” Mother declares.

Henry slightly bows his head. “Unfortunately there is no way out of this for her.”

Stars flitter around my vision as I grip onto Mother’s hand, holding on as tight as I can, trying to stay upright. Is Avira watching right now? Is she smirking and laughing about how pitiful I look?

“There is really no way out of it?” Mother asks. “You couldn’t ask the prince to get her out of it?”

“There is only so much the prince can do. While he does not like Avira right now, she does work closely with his father. He said that you can hear her out and not say anything at all and then leave, but you have to meet with her so that he doesn’t get in trouble,” Henry explains.

Of course. Prince Archie may care about me a tiny bit, but he cares more about himself and how it will impact him. I shouldn’t have believed that he really cared for me.

“Let’s go. You can tell me where you want to meet with her while we walk there,” Henry says.

“You don’t have to go if you don’t want to,” Mother whispers in my ear.

I turn toward her and take a deep breath. “But I do. I don’t want anything to happen to you or the baby. I’ll just go and hear what she has to say and then I’ll leave.”

Adeline, is everything okay? I can feel dread flowing through you, Kieran asks.

Turning to Henry, I lock eyes with him. “Let’s talk where I had a discussion with Skylar. Out in the open so she can’t do anything.”

He nods and calls over one of the guards, pointing to the bench in the middle of town.

Everything is okay, I lie.

Sweets. His voice holds disappointment. I know you’re lying. What is going on?

Avira wants to talk to me and the prince granted it. There is no way out of it.

I can’t be seen in town when you are there but there will be some of our people there that will watch over you to make sure nothing happens, Kieran replies.

No, I say sternly. Don’t allow them to do that. I don’t want them to get hurt or die if Avira tries to do something to me. I will never forgive myself if one of them gets hurt because of me.

Worry flows through my body as Henry and I slowly walk toward the bench. There are Fae straight ahead of us, their eyes looking over at us every once in a while.

They know not to engage in anything unless it looks like you are going to die, but they are going to watch you and your conversation with Avira. Even if I told them not to, they still will because they care about you.

I hate that Kieran is right. I know they are going to watch over me even if he tells them not to.

They care for you. Don’t wish that away, Kieran says.

I’m not, but I just want them to be safe as well. I want them to know that they don’t have to step in if something bad happens to me and then they get whipped or even killed. I don’t want them to regret helping me if something really bad happens, I whisper.

They won’t. They think of it as an honor to help keep you safe and look after you. They would lay down their lives for you in a heartbeat.

That’s what I’m worried about. I don’t know how to react to that. I’m just one person and they are willing to do that for me.

No one has ever said those words to me. I’ve never seen them stick up for me, but I know they would. They didn’t hate me when Kieran got taken away and whipped twice because of me. They didn’t give me mean looks, and they were actually worried about me.

You are one very important person to them. They were skeptical of you in the beginning, but when they saw how you treated me and the other Fae you interacted with, they slowly started to realize that you weren’t going to harm them. When you got the book for us, it made them ten times more protective of you because they heard what happened afterwards. You have proven that you are meant to be the High Lady, Kieran says.

“We’re here,” Henry says, pulling me from my conversation with Kieran. “I know you were talking to him. Make sure you don’t while you are in front of Avira. You don’t want her to suspect anything.”

“Right,” I mumble. She thinks I love a Fae, but doesn’t know that he’s actually my mate or who he is.

I need to keep it that way.

“If you want to leave at any point you just let me know and I will get you out of here. The prince does expect you to listen to her and what she has to say, but after that you can be done,” Henry reminds me.

“Okay.” I sit down on the bench.

In hindsight, I wouldn’t have gone out for a walk yesterday if I knew I was going to be meeting Avira here today. My body is sore and aching all over, and being on edge is only making it worse.

“If she tries anything I’m relying on you. I can’t move fast enough,” I tell Henry.

“I will keep a close eye and stay nearby.” He nods.

Silence falls upon us but it doesn’t last long before Avira walks straight up to me. My whole body locks, terror running through me as I stare at her.

“Hello,” she says, smirking. “It’s so nice to see you. How have you been?”

I push my lips together as I continue to look at her.

“Adeline?” she calls. “Are you alright? It looks like you’ve seen a ghost. Did something happen to you?”

She knows exactly what happened to me.

“Get on with what you want to talk to her about,” Henry says as he takes a step closer to me.

I finally manage to get a breath into my lungs as Henry gets closer to me.

“You may leave while we talk.” Avira dismisses him.

“I was told to stay right next to Adeline while you talk to her,” he replies.

Avira glares at him for several seconds.

“He isn’t going anywhere,” I say, my voice weak.

Her eyes snap to mine and narrow. “Because you said so? You don’t have any authority yet. I don’t want him here while I talk to you and ask questions. I want him where he can’t hear anything.”

“The prince told me to stay close and protect her. You may be her sister, but the prince told me what you did to her and he does not want her alone right now,” Henry says before I utter a word.

Avira clenches her jaw before sitting down next to me. “Okay. That is okay.”

It is anything but okay. She’s mad, and I can’t help but wonder if she’s going to try and do something to me later when Henry goes back home for the night. Will she take me in the dead of night back to the dungeon?

Gripping my dress, I lock eyes with her. “What do you want?”

“I just wanted to ask a couple of questions.” She smiles sweetly at me as people walk past us.

“Yes?”

“What does he look like?” she asks.

“Who?” I reply, keeping my tone even.

“The Fae that you are in love with.”

“I don’t know what you’re talking about,” I lie.

Avira chuckles. “Oh, sweet Adeline. You do know you told me that you had fallen in love with one of them before I told you who I was.”

“I don’t love him anymore,” I lie, flinching slightly at my words.

“Lie,” she whispers, getting closer to my face. “It’s a lie and you know it. Who is he? Is he in Bellhollow or in Hellhollow? Who am I kidding? He has to be here since you have fallen in love with him. You wouldn’t have enough time to get to know him in Hellhollow.”

Sweat slides down the middle of my back as she continues to talk.

“How about we line up all the Fae and we go through them one by one. I’ll give them two lashes from a whip and watch your reaction. That will be an easy way for me to tell who it is.” She smirks.

“You know I don’t like violence and won’t be able to handle any of that,” I whisper, my voice quivering as I imagine her doing just that.

She hums and tilts her head. “True, but I will get enjoyment out of watching you puke, cry, and beg for me to stop.”

“Avira.” Henry’s voice drops an octave.

Sighing, she rolls her eyes. “Fine. We won’t do anything, but give me one detail about him.”

“He has brown hair,” I reply, holding my smirk back.

Her face falls and she looks at me with disgust. “Something else besides that. There are so many of them that have brown hair. I would say ninety percent of them have brown hair.”

“You said to give one detail and I did. You didn’t specify what kind of detail,” I reply, finding a little confidence with Henry so close to me. “Now, do you need anything else?”

Avira growls. “I don’t like this newfound confidence you have. So then tell me where the book is and I will be on my way.”

“I told you before that I don’t know what book, and I don’t have the book,” I say, contradicting myself.

“You do have the book. I smelt it all over you,” she says, annoyed.

So she isn’t afraid to talk about it right in front of Henry. Is she not worried he will ask questions, or has she placed some kind of spell over him to make him forget everything?

“I don’t have the book. I told you before that I found a book in a random hallway in the palace and lost it when I was walking back from Hellhollow,” I reply.

“Then get the book back.”

“I can’t. Prince Archie wants me to recuperate and not do a lot of things since we don’t know when the wedding will be now.” I smile sweetly at her.

I’m surprised she can’t cast a spell to locate it.

“Is that all?” I ask. “I am exhausted and I would really like to go back to the house. I was told you were going to talk about why you did what you did and apologize, but I guess I was wrong.”

I stand up, taking a deep breath as I steady myself.

“I hope to never see you again,” I say, keeping my back to her. “Let’s go, Henry.”

“I’m not done with you!” Avira yells as we start walking.

I hold my breath, clenching my hands as we walk away. Avira yells several things but I block them out, keeping my head down.

“We’re here,” Henry says.

“Thanks,” I mumble, and walk into the house before he can say anything else.

CHAPTER 13

“Do you think she’ll come back to talk to me?” I mutter, mostly talking to myself.

“She will until you give her the information she wants,” Mother replies as she sets down a hot cup of tea in front of me.

I wrap my hands around the cup, letting the warmth seep into my skin. It’s been two days since I last saw Avira and I can’t shake off the feeling that something bad is going to happen soon… something absolutely horrible.

“You are never alone now, so you don’t need to worry about her doing something to you,” she says.

“Do you actually believe me when I tell you that she is the witch?” I whisper.

Peeping ears. There is always someone walking by the house who could hear what we say in this house and tell anyone, getting us in trouble.

Mother nods. “In the beginning I didn’t, but after I gave it some thought there were things that didn’t add up. I didn’t have the same connection with her that I do with you. While I cared for her and remembered the pain of giving birth, there was nothing else, but I didn’t question it. Not until you came back all battered and bruised.”

Relief floods through me. I thought she was just putting up a facade. I’ve told her so much in the past couple of months and she has believed me.

How are you feeling? Kieran asks.

Uneasy, I reply honestly.

It’s like waiting for a ticking time bomb and I have no idea when it’s going to go off. Will I ever know?

Because of the witch and not knowing anything?

Yes, I whisper.

I wake up every morning, terrified that she is going to come and take me.

I go to bed every night, wondering if she’ll come in the dead of night and kill all of us.

I know too much… and she knows that.

Why is she keeping me alive?

Why can’t she track the book herself?

Everything is going to be okay. As long as you are always with someone and she doesn’t become desperate then she won’t do anything in public, Kieran explains.

She could become desperate at any moment, though.

She could, but I don’t think she will. She has to play the long game, and her becoming desperate so soon won’t do her any good. If she kills you then she will never find the book.

Why can’t she track the book? Isn’t she powerful?

“Prince Archie is outside,” Mother says, tapping the table to get my attention.

My eyes widen as I turn to look out the window. He’s talking to Henry. What could he possibly want?

“Just sit and drink your tea. I will go see what he wants.” Mother stands up and walks to the door.

Should I go into my room and pretend that I’m sleeping so he doesn’t come and talk to me? No. Mother told me to sit, and if she comes in with him and I’m not here she could get into trouble.

I mindlessly stir the tea, my mind far away from everything.

She can’t track the book because⁠—

Prince Archie is here, I whisper, panicked.

Kieran goes silent right as the door opens, Mother and the prince walking in.

“Prince Archie was so kind to come and check on you,” Mother says. “Would you like some tea?”

I move to stand up but Prince Archie lifts his hand.

“You do not need to get up. I want you to rest.” Prince Archie sits across from me. “No thank you to the tea.”

Mother stands at the end of the table, all of us deadly silent… an awkward silence.

“Can I do something for you?” I ask politely.

“I wanted to see how you were healing. It looks like the bruises and cuts on your face are healing up nicely. How about everything else?” he inquires, placing his folded hands on the table.

“I am still extremely weak. I find it difficult to stand or doing anything for a long period of time. I have not been sleeping well either and I do not have an appetite,” I reply honestly.

Always being on edge has made sleep and eating become things of the past. I’m lucky if I can get a couple hours of sleep each night.

I wonder if Kieran knows I’m having trouble sleeping.

“Is there anything I can do to help you?” Prince Archie asks. “I have increased the guards in town to make sure that you are safe at all times. Henry is here to keep you safe.”

“I don’t want to see her ever again,” I whisper.

“I don’t know if I can keep you from seeing each other, but I can try,” Prince Archie replies.

Sighing, I look down at my cup of tea. “I don’t want to have to talk to her again. It puts too much stress on me and I’m not getting any better.”

Memories resurface every time I get a glimpse of her. Terror runs through my body for days on end.

I’m in a constant state of fear.

“I can do that. I will tell my father what happened and let him know that she will not be able to talk to you again. If she has anything to say then she will have to go through several people so you don’t have to talk to her,” Prince Archie finally says.

My eyebrows bunch together as relief floods through me. Is Prince Archie changing a little? “Why are you being so kind to me?”

Prince Archie turns to my mother. “You should go check on your newborn.”

Mother and I make eye contact.

“It’s okay, Mother,” I say.

She nods and heads to her room, leaving us alone.

“Do not get me wrong, Adeline. I am still the same as I was before. Once we are married you will not be able to go out to the forest but once every other week. You will be in the palace, and any time I want you, you will be available,” he says, his voice hard. “I am being kind to you right now because I want you to be healthy by the time we get married. I am pushing the wedding back another year so you can heal fully and not have nightmares. That also means that in a year you will need to get over the fact that your sister did that to you.”

I open and close my mouth, shocked at what he says.

I can’t believe I thought he had changed. He is still the same evil prince he was before.

Prince Archie stands up. “I will be back in a month to see how you’re healing. I will also be bringing some cream for you to put on your scars, so when the wedding comes your skin is blemish free.”

He leaves before I can say anything.

“I can’t believe him,” Mother grumbles as she walks into the kitchen. “He thinks he can just say and do anything and there will be no consequences. Well, you know what? I can’t wait until the Fae break the curse and your mate goes after him. I can’t wait until he gets what he deserves.”

“You and me both,” I say.

“Now, gently release the cup from your death grip and go take a little walk.” Mother gives me a pointed look.

“I don’t know if I have enough strength to walk around right now,” I mumble. “Prince Archie took a lot out of me. I just want to lie down and sleep.”

But I know even if I do that, sleep won’t actually come.

“I think you should go on a walk to the forest. It will calm you down,” Mother says. “He will.”

Are you free? I find myself asking Kieran after hearing my mother’s words.

Yes, he replies. Come.

“I guess I’m going out,” I mumble, and push myself off the chair.

My right leg in particular has been giving me trouble. The man who beat me several times loved to give his attention to my right leg, almost like he wanted me to constantly think about him and Avira after.

I grab my jacket and put it on as I walk out the door. Even though it’s warming up, my body hasn’t been able to regulate its temperature.

“Going on a walk to clear your head?” Henry asks, pushing off the wall.

Dipping my head, I set out for the forest, taking my sweet time. I try my hardest to keep my walk normal, clenching my teeth as it gets difficult and tears spring in my eyes.

“Don’t,” Henry scolds.

“What?” I look at him, not caring if he can see my tears.

Before I got taken I would have wiped them away and pretended like nothing had happened but now… now I don’t care. I don’t have the energy to care about it.

“Don’t try to force your walk to look normal,” he says. “I saw you walk with a limp the other day when you were meeting Avira and you shouldn’t force yourself to walk normally. It is only going to make it worse, and you need to rest.”

“Walking with a limp will show people that I’m still hurt. I’m going to get into a bad habit of walking with a limp if I continue,” I reply. “Then it will be a hard habit to break, and everyone, including myself, will remember what happened to me.”

Henry stays silent as we walk into the forest, and before we know it, we’re in the clearing where I normally meet Kieran.

“We really need to change the location,” I say, out of breath. “But I don’t think I can walk any further than this right now. Not without taking another break or exhausting myself too much.”

But even when we changed locations regularly, we still got caught and that’s how this all started.

But without getting caught I would never have been able to roam around the castle. Without the deal I made, I would have never had the chance to see the hallway where the witch stays and get the book. We wouldn’t be where we are right now, one step closer to figuring out how to break the curse.

“We will change the location when you are healed more,” Henry says. “There are Fae walking around right now to make sure that no one is spying on you. And with me here, there shouldn’t be anyone keeping tabs on you.”

“Unless Avira tells someone to do it,” I mumble, chills running down my spine at the thought.

What if she possesses someone and makes them get close to me? What if they are spying on me and I have no idea because they are still acting the same?

“The Fae will be able to tell if any magic has been used,” Henry reminds me. “Don’t worry too much about it. We are keeping you safe.”

“You may go see Zahra,” Kieran says as he walks into the clearing. “Thank you for bringing her here safely.”

Henry bows before heading deeper into the forest. How did he meet his mate? Did it take a long time for them to get to know and trust each other? Was Henry accepting of having a Fae mate since he is a guard for the king?

So many questions run through my head as he disappears behind trees, giving myself a pounding headache.

“Sit. I’ll rub your temples and shoulders to help relieve some of the stress,” Kieran instructs me.

Sitting down, I wince as Kieran gently rubs my temple, making it shoot sharp pain across my skull.

“Tell me if it’s too much,” he says.

“Okay.”

“What did the prince want?” he asks.

I thought I could  get away with not talking about the prince and how he acted. But I know Kieran wants to be in the know and make sure that I’m okay.

“He wanted to know how I was doing. He pushed the wedding back until next spring to give me time to heal and get used to the fact that my sister did something unthinkable to me.” I chuckle at the end. “If only he knew she wasn’t my sister, but the witch.”

“Anything else? Your mood got worse and you were scared for a brief second.” His hands move to my shoulders, slowly working on releasing the tension there.

“He is still the same person as before. Wicked and not kind at all. He wants to do everything he said before, and said when we get married that he is only going to let me out of the palace to walk in the forest once every other week.” Anger courses through me.

“When we get married and the curse is broken, you can go out as many times as you want to walk around the forest,” Kieran tells me. “You won’t be confined to just being in the house. You can talk to whoever you want and can stay out as long as you want. But you will have a guard with you just in case. Not to keep tabs on you, but to make sure that you’re safe and if you get hurt or need anything, they can help you.”

“I don’t mind having a guard. As long as they aren’t reporting every single detail about what I do in a day,” I say as I turn my head and look at him.

“You do not have to worry about that. I trust you,” he says.

Closing my eyes, my shoulders drop as Kieran continues to rub my shoulders.

“You haven’t been sleeping well, have you?” Kieran finally asks.

“Can you feel that through the bond?”

He chuckles. “Not that you’re awake, but I can feel you being scared in the middle of the night and I figure it’s from a nightmare. And you have dark circles under your eyes.”

“Perfect,” I mumble. “I’ve been avoiding looking at myself in the mirror. I didn’t think I looked that bad.”

“You’re still beautiful, but people can tell that you’re going through something. It’s okay,” he says as he goes back to massaging my head. “It’s going to get better. You’re going to get through this and overcome the nightmares.”

“I think the only way I’m going to start getting better is if she is dead,” I say, my voice trembling slightly.

“And soon she will be dead.”

I turn my head and look at him. “I want to see her die.”

“Sweets,” he says. “I don’t want you to have nightmares from seeing her die.”

“I don’t—” I take a deep breath, trying to calm myself. “I don’t think I will be able to move on and not be afraid if I don’t see her die in front of my own eyes. I trust you, but my mind is at war with itself right now, and I’m worried if I don’t see it then I will never get over it and will always look over my shoulder wondering if she is alive and coming after me.”

Avira has sunk her claws deep into me and I know I will be carrying this wound the rest of my life… even if it gets a little easier with each passing day. I’m never going to forget what she did to me.

“When the time comes we will revisit the idea.” He kisses the side of my head.

I lean back and relax in his embrace. My body grows heavy as we sit in silence, sleep begging to pull me under and give my body the rest it needs.

“It’s time to go,” Henry interrupts.

Groaning, I barely have the strength to crack an eye open. “Just a couple more minutes so I can get a little nap in?”

Henry shakes his head. “We have already been out here long enough and we do not want to draw suspicion on us when the prince just visited you. Come on, let’s go.”

CHAPTER 14

“How was your last visit with your mate?” Mother asks.

I lean over, banging my head on the table in front of me.

“Adeline, is everything alright?”

“I fell asleep,” I mumble.

“You, what? Sit up straight and talk to me. What happened?” Mother sits in front of me.

“I fell asleep the last time I was with him. We sat down and I laid my head on his shoulder, and before I know it I was being woken up to leave. I don’t even remember saying a single word to him,” I grumble, annoyed at myself.

I had wanted to talk to Kieran so badly in person and just be in his presence but I just had to fall asleep.

Sweets, it’s okay, Kieran tries to soothe me through the bond.

“Was he mad at you?” Mother inquires.

I shake my head. “He wasn’t. He was happy that I was finally able to get some sleep. He made sure I stayed asleep the whole time so that I could get the rest I needed.”

I wanted to talk to you, I reply. I wanted to be in your presence and talk to you about things. I wanted to be awake for it all so that I could remember it.

“Well, him and I are thankful that you slept. You need all the sleep you can get.” Mother gives me a pointed look. “Don’t think I don’t know that you wake up from nightmares every single night.”

“Can everyone tell?” I ask.

And next time you come we will sit and talk to each other. But you needed to get that sleep and I wouldn’t have it any other way.

Sighing, I lean my head back and look up at the ceiling.

“In the beginning it wasn’t, but you have lost weight and you have dark circles under your eyes. Any time you want to go lay down, you can do so. You need all the rest you can get, and all the food,” she says.

“I guess I’m going to go lay down then,” I tell her. “I can barely keep my eyes open right now.”

Mother smiles and nods. I quickly go to my room and lay down on the bed.

I’m going to try and get some sleep, I whisper to Kieran.

Sleep well, he replies, and I fall asleep.

Shooting up from bed, sweat slides down my face and back. I heave in a breath.

“It was just a dream,” I whisper to myself as I gently tap my chest above my heart.

“Adeline?” Mother peeks into my room. “Come and have a warm cup of tea.”

Nodding, I get off my bed and walk into the kitchen, sitting down right as Mother places the cup down.

“Same nightmare?” she asks.

“Yes.” I clear my throat, taking a sip of the tea.

I let it soothe me.

“How long was I out for?” I ask.

“Three hours.”

Expected. It seems like three hours is the most I can get no matter the time of day. When is this going to get better?

When she’s dead.

But I have no idea when she is going to die. They need to figure out how to break the curse.

Have you gotten any closer? I ask Kieran.

“Everything is going to get better. I’m going to trade some jackets I made for some herbs that you can drink before you go to bed. Hopefully it will help you sleep through the night,” Mother informs me.

“What kind of herbs?” I ask.

“Ones that will hopefully knock you out so you won’t dream but get sleep.”

Shaking my head, I place my cup down. “I don’t want to be knocked out. What if she comes in the middle of the night and tries to do something?”

“You can’t think like that. She is not going to come in the middle of the night to get you. You need to sleep, and if this is how it’s going to work then we are going to do it. When you take it for the first time I will sit beside your bed the whole night to make sure nothing happens,” she says.

Not yet, Kieran replies.

“I can sleep perfectly fine when I’m with him,” I mumble to myself.

“But you can’t always be with him. For you to get the proper sleep you need, you can’t stay with him that long. It will bring too much suspicion,” she replies.

“I know. Maybe I can slip away in the dead of the night and get some good sleep.”

She shakes her head. “Did you forget what the prince told you? He has made sure there are more guards in town so that you’re safe. They patrol during the night as well.”

“I hadn’t noticed that they were,” I say as I look out the window.

Ever since I came back from being tortured, I haven’t been as focused at all. I don’t pay attention to details to make sure everything is okay or if I need to keep watch of someone.

My mind has been preoccupied.

“I knew from the day you were back that you would need someone to look after you and make sure they were keeping account of everything happening around you,” Mother explains. “I wanted you to not have to worry about anything else but healing properly.”

“Thank you.” I wipe away the lone tear.

Mother places her hand on my shoulder, giving it a little squeeze before walking off to get food.

“Can you go to Leah’s stall and get me some salt?” Mother asks as she turns around. “I seem to have run out.”

Guilt flows through me. It was always my task to make sure that everything was stocked, and if we were running low I would buy it before Mother noticed.

“Adeline, you were gone for over a month. It’s okay,” she says.

“I should have made sure when I got here that everything was okay and you had everything you needed.”

It was my job.

Guilt turns into anger and I clench my fist, taking a deep breath.

Mother kneels in front of me, cupping my hands in hers. “Adeline, I want you to listen to me carefully. Can you do that?”

“Yes,” I whisper.

“You told me yourself that you almost passed out several times on the way here from the castle. You were in so much pain that you couldn’t look around to see if there was anything. I didn’t expect you to do any of that. I wanted you to rest and relax,” she explains. “I don’t care if things do not get done around the house. The only thing I care about is that you are home and healing. I’m so happy that I get to wake up every morning and see you safe in the house. And when you heal completely, you aren’t going to have as many responsibilities as before.”

“Mother.” I shake my head.

“No, I want you to listen to me. Before, you took so much on, even when your father was alive. You made sure that everything was okay and then when he did pass away, you took on even more. You are young and I want you to have some fun in your life. I want you to go to the forest and see your mate. And when the curse is broken I want you to be able to be with him and not spend all your time at home doing chores,” she says. “I want you to have less responsibility so you can enjoy your life while you’re young. I don’t want you to look back on life and regret not doing things because you were taking care of me and the house.”

“But that will leave everything to you. You have a newborn,” I point out.

“The Fae male still comes and helps out once, sometimes twice a week. He has become efficient in getting a lot of things done so we don’t have to worry about them.”

Elias.

“So I don’t want you to feel guilty about some things not happening because they were your job before. Right now I just want you to relax and get better. Once you are fully healed we can talk about your chores around the house.” She gives me a pointed look. “That doesn’t mean I won’t ask you every once in a while to go grab something. I’m not going to make you useless, but I want your priority right now to be healing. Do you understand?”

“Yes.”

Mother stands up and walks over to the tin jar, grabbing money. “Now, can you go get the salt?”

I grab the money and head out the door, greeting Henry before making my way to Leah’s stall.

“Can I have a pound of salt?” I ask.

Leah nods and starts working on grabbing the pound of salt.

“Actually, can you make it two pounds?”

I look around the town as she works on what I need. People are trying not to make it obvious but I can tell they are looking at me and whispering. How bad have the rumors gotten now?

My eyes subconsciously move to the Fae, some giving small nods when we make eye contact.

“Is life going to get better?” I ask as I turn to Henry.

He shrugs, not saying a word.

Leah places the two pounds of salt on the counter and I hand her the money.

“Life is what you make of it,” Leah says after a while, her eyes darting toward Henry for a brief second. “You get to decide if you want to make it happy or not.”

“Thanks,” I mutter.

“Don’t give up so easily. I bet life for you is going to get a lot better soon. After all, you are marrying the prince. You’ll have everything you want and can ask him for anything. Just don’t forget about us.” She giggles at the end.

If only she knew the truth.

I go to pick up the salt but Henry grabs it before I can.

“Thank you again.” I give her a small smile and walk off.

Turning to Henry, I hold my hand out. “I can take it from here.”

He shakes his head. “You are still healing and shouldn’t be holding anything heavy. I will carry it.”

Sighing, we walk in silence the rest of the way to the house. Henry walks in with me, setting down the salt on the table before leaving.

“Thank you,” Mother calls out, and looks at me. “Thank you.”

“Everyone thinks I’m going to have a wonderful life with the prince if we get married,” I say as I trace my finger on the table mindlessly. “Do they really not see who the royal family is? Do they not see how horrible they are to people?”

“You have to remember that most of these people have not talked with the prince or any of the royal family. They have only seen them from afar,” Mother reminds me.

“But how do they not dislike them for the way they are living? Everyone is suffering and only making ends meet while they are living this lavish life. How is that fair to anyone? How do they not see that they could be living a better life?” I ask. “They are only surviving when they could be thriving. If the royal family wasn’t ruling over this realm.”

Even before I knew the truth, I still didn’t like the royal family and how they were living. It never seemed fair to me.

“Because they don’t want to bring attention to themselves. They don’t want to get on the royal family’s radar and possibly get banished or killed,” Mother replies. “They have their reasons. A lot of them probably know how horrible they are living but choose to stick with it instead of making a scene, not knowing if anyone will join them or if they will be the only ones.”

“It needs to change,” I mumble.

“And it will when the curse is broken. You and your mate are going to change this world.”

CHAPTER 15

One month has passed since Leah told me I was going to have a great time with Prince Archie when we get married.

One month of taking it easy and letting my body heal.

The nightmares still come to me every single night and I never get a break. Sometimes it’s two or three times a night, making me absolutely exhausted during the day.

But no matter how exhausted I am, I can’t manage to get more than a couple hours of sleep.

“I’m going to go out and see him,” I tell my mother. “Do you need anything while I’m out?”

She shakes her head. “Don’t over exhaust yourself.” She gives me a pointed look. “While you’re eating a little more than before, you aren’t sleeping any better and I’m worried about you.”

“Don’t worry.” I force a smile on my face. “He won’t allow me to stand or lift anything when I’m with him.”

I walk out of the house and look at Henry before walking to the forest.

“How has Zahra been?” I ask.

“She is the same as always. Can’t wait for it to be broken, but she’s hanging in there.”

“Was she alive before you know what?” I whisper.

He nods. “But she was very young and doesn’t remember much.”

We fall silent as we get into the forest. It doesn’t take long for us to get to the clearing.

“I will be back soon. Don’t wander off.” He gives me a pointed look.

The last time I was here with Kieran we went to a different clearing and Henry was not happy. But I had wanted to see a certain type of butterfly and Kieran knew exactly where to find it.

To say I got an earful from Henry on the way back to the house is an understatement. Any time we go out he always reminds me, even if we aren’t in the forest.

“How is translating the book going? Have you found out which one the spell is so we can break the curse?” I ask Kieran as I sit on the ground.

Kieran pulls a bag from his side and sets it in front of me. “I brought food for you to eat. You still aren’t eating enough and I want you to gain the weight back that you lost. Are you still having trouble sleeping?”

“Why are you ignoring my question?” I ask, tilting my head to the side.

Unease fills me as he stays silent.

“Because I want to make sure that my mate is healthy and comfortable. I want to take care of you and make sure you have everything you need, and that means giving you food,” he replies. “I will even feed you if you want me to.”

Heat rises to my cheeks and I look away from him.

“Now, I brought your favorites. These filled buns are still hot and waiting for you to eat them.” He wiggles his eyebrows at me when I look back at him. “I also brought a piece of candy an elder made the other day. She wants you to try it to see if you like it.”

“Candy?” My eyebrows furrow.

How do they have the ingredients to make candy? I thought they were only given a little bit of rations and they hunted for their meat.

“Yes, a small piece of candy. She only had enough ingredients for two pieces and she wanted me to give some to you,” Kieran says.

“Why doesn’t she enjoy them herself?” I ask as I stare at the two pieces of candy in his hands.

“Because she wanted you to try them. She used to be a candy maker before the curse was placed and she wants you to enjoy some to make your day better.”

Tears form in my eyes and I push my bottom lip out.

“Is there any way for me to meet her?”

Kieran shakes his head. “Not right now. She can’t walk much and there is not enough time for us to get to her before Henry comes back.”

“I want to meet her,” I declare.

“And you will. But for now, let’s eat and then you can have a piece of candy.”

Kieran pulls out the buns and hands me one.

“Are you still having trouble sleeping?” Kieran asks as he bites into one of the buns.

I shrug. “Sometimes.”

Lie.

It’s all the time. I still can’t manage to get more than three hours of sleep consecutively. After having a nightmare I’ll stay awake for a while before my body pulls me back to sleep, only to be woken up once more. It’s an exhausting cycle and I just want to be able to sleep through the whole night.

Mother has threatened to get the herbs, but I’ve managed to stop her. My fear only grows when she brings them up. So many different things could go on when I’m knocked out.

“Sweets.” His voice is disapproving. “Tell the truth.”

“I’m still not sleeping well,” I sigh. “Mother has mentioned some herbs that will knock me out, but I can’t do it.”

Kieran runs a hand up and down my arm. “Why don’t you try it out at least once? It could even be during the day so you have Henry outside your door the whole time.”

Shaking my head, I look down at the bun. “She could still get in the house even if Henry is standing outside. She got me from outside my house to the dungeon before I even knew what was happening. She could easily come into my room without anyone knowing and I wouldn’t be able to say anything since I would be knocked out.”

“But at some point your body is going to get so exhausted that you will just pass out for hours and you won’t be able to do anything. I don’t want you walking around and passing out and hurting yourself. You don’t know when that is going to happen and I don’t want you to do it when something serious is happening,” Kieran says.

“But I’m so worried that she is going to come back and get me. She could hide me somewhere else where no one would find me, and she could use a spell so I wouldn’t be able to communicate with you. What then?” I ask.

Kieran places his bun down and gently holds my shoulders, making me face him. “That is not going to happen. She knows that the prince is watching over you. If the guards don’t see you walking out of the house they will report it to him. Henry will report it to him. I have no doubt your mother will look for you and let everyone know that you’re missing. People will look for you, but even then it is not going to happen. She can’t risk taking you again.”

“What if you’re wrong?” I question.

“I’m not. It would be extremely foolish of her to do it. If you want, I can talk to someone about herbs and tell you how much you should take. There will be different dosages to make you sleep more or less and you can start off with a small amount so you aren’t out very long. And I would try it during the day so that your mother and Henry can keep an eye on you,” he explains.

“Really?”

He nods his head. “I will talk to them after this and the next time we meet I will give you some. We are going to let you get sleep.”

Worry builds inside me with all the possibilities that could happen while I’m asleep. What if the prince comes and wants to talk to me but I can’t be woken up? Will he do anything to my mother?

“Everything is going to be okay,” Kieran whispers. “Now, finish up your bun and then I can give you a piece of candy.”

He lets go of me and I finish the bun, letting it fill my stomach. Every single time I meet with Kieran he always brings me food… delicious food, but I can never eat everything he brings.

“Here’s the piece of candy.” He hands it over.

I plop it in my mouth and sigh in content as the lemon and sweet taste bursts in my mouth.

“This is so good,” I mumble. “If I bring more ingredients for her, do you think she can make more?” I ask before I can stop myself.

Kieran chuckles. “I can ask her if you want, but I have a feeling she will say yes.”

“Perfect,” I say to myself and look at him. “I could get addicted to these very easily.”

“When the curse is broken you can have them made any time you want. We will always have a stock of them so you never run out,” Kieran replies.

Excitement runs through me and I can’t help but clap. “Now that is something to look forward to.”

“You aren’t looking forward to always being by my side? You aren’t looking forward to walking down the street with me while we hold hands?” he asks.

I gently slap his arm. “You know I am looking forward to that and more. I have so many things to look forward to but I’ve never tasted a candy like this and I want more. I want to be able to eat as many as I want in a day and not have to ration them.”

My mind is already thinking of only having one piece of candy every day or every other day when I get them from Kieran.

“Was this her favourite candy to make before the curse was placed?” I ask.

He nods. “She had several different ones she made, but everyone loved these and they would sell out if you weren’t fast enough.”

“Maybe when I bring the ingredients next she can make them but give them to the Fae that are here,” I suggest, looking away from him. “I bet you guys haven’t had it in forever and you should have something that you look forward to. A reminder of what is to come.”

“Sweets, you don’t have to do that.”

I hold my hands up and shake them. “But I want to. They have accepted me without even meeting me. They look out for me, even if they can’t do much, when I’m out in town. I want to give them something in return.”

Kieran cups my face and gives me a peck. “You are so sweet, Sweets,” he mumbles. “I have a feeling I’m going to be in trouble when the curse is broken.”

Gasping, I pull away from him. “What does that mean?”

Kieran chuckles and shakes his head. “It means I have a feeling you are going to buy a lot of candy and give it out to people. But once they find out you like this candy, they are going to buy sweets and give them to you as well.”

“I don’t want to do this if they feel like they are going to have to do it back.” I look down at my hands. “I just wanted to do something nice.”

“They aren’t going to do it because they feel like it but because they want to. The very brief moment my dad and mother were together, free, the Fae doted on my mother. They brought her candies and food. When they found out that my mother was craving a certain food while she was pregnant with me, they made sure that it never sold out and that there was always some during day and night so she could have one.”

“They sound so nice.”

I long for the day when we can all be free and help each other out without fear. To not be making ends meet and wondering when we can eat next.

“Soon, Sweets… Very soon everything is going to change,” Kieran whispers.

CHAPTER 16

“Mother, I want you to try this,” I say, holding out the other piece of lemon candy.

Kieran and I went back and forth for a while on who was going to have the last piece. I wanted him to have it so he could have something sweet, but he said the lady made it for me and only me.

“What is it? Where did you get it?” she asks.

“It’s candy and I got it from him. It’s so delicious.” I place the candy in her hand. “Go on… try it.”

Mother looks at it for several seconds before hesitantly putting it in her mouth.

“Oh, this is delicious,” she whispers, her eyes going wide.

“The next time I meet with him I’m going to bring the ingredients so he can have the lady make more,” I say, wiggling my eyebrows.

My mother thinks the candy is just as delicious as I thought it was, I tell Kieran.

I figured you were going to give it to her and not keep it for yourself. He chuckles. I’m glad you both like it though.

Tell her thank you again. It definitely brightened up both of our days. Though, my day was already brightened just by seeing you, I mumble.

I look away from my mother as my cheeks heat up.

Adeline, he says huskily.

I shouldn’t have said that in front of my mother.

Kieran growls and I take a deep breath, slowly letting it out before I look back at my mother.

“Are you alright?” Mother asks.

I nod, not trusting my voice. Does she suspect what Kieran and I were talking about? How could I have been so naive to say that in front of my mother?

“Are you running a fever?” Mother asks as she walks closer to me. Before I can say anything, she places the back of her hand on my forehead. “You don’t feel hot. Did one of your wounds get infected?”

I shake my head. “No, they haven’t.”

“Let me look at the one on your thigh,” she demands.

Sighing, I pull my dress up and look away, not wanting to see the cut on my thigh. While I haven’t been diligent about putting the salve on it, I have looked at it every once in a while to make sure that it was doing okay.

“When was the last time you looked at it?” Mother asks. “When was the last time you put the salve on it?”

“Last week,” I mumble, wincing.

I haven’t been paying attention to it now that I’m slowly starting to do things again and meeting Kieran.. But I still know it’s there because of the pain I’m in whenever I walk.

It’ll take forever to heal if I continue to neglect it and push myself, but I want to see Kieran. I want to get better as soon as possible so I can forget about everything that happened to me and move on.

Lie.

I’m never going to forget about what happened, but maybe if I try hard enough I won’t think about it as often.

“Adeline Duvall,” Mother scolds me. “You need to pay better attention to your wounds.”

“It’s doing fine,” I say without thinking.

“Adeline, look at it,” she demands.

Clenching my jaw, I look down at the cut.

Shit.

“Oh,” I whisper. “I didn’t realize it was⁠—”

“That’s exactly right. You didn’t realize because you weren’t paying attention to it and making sure that you were healing properly. Last week when?”

“I don’t remember,” I say, closing my eyes to get the horrible sight away from me.

But it’s already engraved in my mind. Red. Swollen. Almost puffy.

My cut is infected.

“Adeline, you need to take better care of yourself. If you don’t then what are you going to do later down the road?” she asks. “You need to think about the future. What if it gets so infected that you have to have part of your thigh cut out and you won’t be able to walk normally? What then?”

“I didn’t think about that.” I look up at her, tears glistening in my eyes.

“You need to start thinking about it. Does your mate know?”

I shake my head. “If I didn’t know then he doesn’t know. And I want to keep it that way. I don’t want him to worry more about me and not focus on what’s important.”

But I hear his words ring through my head. He is going to worry about me no matter what. Maybe I should tell him so if he ever finds out it’s not like I kept it from him.

“Let me call the doctor so he can come look at it and assess what we need to do about it,” Mother says as she walks to the door.

I pull my dress down and stand up, grabbing her arm. “No, don’t do that. It will only raise alarm to everyone in town and may even alert the prince. He might demand I go back to the palace with him since I’m not healing well here.”

It is also going to alert the Fae that something is wrong with me and I don’t want Kieran to hear it from someone else. If he is going to hear it… it needs to be from me.

Mother searches my face.

“Please,” I practically beg her. “I’ll put the salve on it every morning and night. I’ll wash it every day and make sure that it’s healing.”

“And if it doesn’t after a couple of days, then I am going to call the doctor. I don’t care if you don’t want anyone to find out. I don’t want you to lose your leg.” She gives me a pointed look.

“Understood.”

I let go of Mother’s arm and walk to the door. Opening it, I’m graced with the sight of Henry leaning up against the wall, looking utterly bored.

“Do you want me to give you a piece of paper and pen so you can draw or write?” I ask, wincing when I step on my bad leg.

Knowing it’s infected makes it hurt a lot more than it did before.

“I told you not to walk so much earlier,” he grumbles. “Did you listen to me? No.”

“Can you pick up some more salve from Kieran?” I ask, whispering his name.

Henry’s eyebrows raise. “What’s wrong?”

“I ran out last week and thought everything was okay, but it’s not.” I rub the back of my neck and don’t look at Henry.

“What’s wrong?” he asks again.

“One of my wounds is infected. I just need you to get it from him after I ask if he can get some more for me.”

Let’s just hope he can get it ready soon so I don’t have to suffer any longer… from my mother’s wrath but also from the pain.

“Contact him and I’ll go there when I go home for the night and will bring it in the morning,” he says. “Can you last that long without it?”

I nod. “Yes, I can. Thank you.”

I turn around and walk back into the house, straight toward the bathroom. Pulling my dress up, I tie it and sit down on a bucket, right in front of the tub of water.

Kieran? I call.

He needs to know before I start cleaning it, in case he can feel my pain.

What’s wrong? Some people said they saw you wincing when you were talking to Henry, he replies.

Of course they already told him something was wrong with me.

I have an infected wound. Henry will be over tonight around sun fall. Do you think you can have some salve ready for him? I ran out last week.

Sweets. How did that happen? he asks.

I thought everything was better when I ran out of the salve. It all looked good and so I didn’t check any of it since the last time. Mother asked to see it and realized it was starting to get infected, I mumble.

Was meeting me what aggravated it? he asks.

Probably not. I didn’t want to look at it and remember everything that happened, so even though it looked good, I didn’t take care of it by washing it and making sure nothing got on it. It was all my doing and none of yours.

Oh, Sweets.

I look up at the ceiling and fan my eyes, trying to stop myself from crying.

I’m going to be okay.

I hope.

I can’t help but shake the feeling that it’s only going to get worse and something terrible is going to happen to my leg. What if Avira placed some type of spell on my cuts to make sure they never heal and get infected?

No.

She wouldn’t have done that. But she definitely could have. That would be one way she would be able to torture me when she can’t get close to me.

I can’t think that way though. Nothing good is going to come from thinking that way.

How bad is the infection? Kieran asks.

Red, swollen, and almost puffy, I mutter.

Is there pus?

I look down at the cut but quickly look away. How am I going to clean this when I don’t even want to look at it?

I don’t know, I manage to say. I can’t bring myself to look at it for too long.

You are going to have to when you clean it. Just start breathing evenly before and focus on your breathing as you look at it. I’ll be here the whole time so you can talk to me to keep calm or I can talk to you. You just let me know what you want to do.

I don’t know.

“Is everything okay?” Mother asks as she peeks into the bathroom.

“I’m trying to look at my cut and clean it but I can’t,” I whine.

“Do you want me to help you?” She walks into the bathroom and kneels down in front of me.

“He wants me to look at it and clean it,” I whisper.

Everything is getting too much and I don’t know what to do.

“How about I tell you what it looks like in detail and you can tell him?” Mother suggests. “And then I can clean it for you. Once you are ready to look at it and clean it, I will be here for you and I know he will be as well. But you don’t need to push yourself too hard.”

“Okay.”

Mother tells me exactly what it looks like and I relay the message to Kieran, letting him know I wasn’t able to do it and my mother is helping.

“I want you to bite down on this while I clean it,” Mother says as she hands me a washcloth. “Bite down as hard as you want.”

CHAPTER 17

Was your mother able to help you clean your wound? Kieran asks after several hours.

I close my eyes as I rest in the kitchen. Mother helped me back into the kitchen after she cleaned my wounds and I immediately laid my head on the table to rest and try to make it through the pain.

She was, I reply, exhausted.

How are you feeling now?

Exhausted. In pain. Wondering if it would be better for me to just cut off my whole leg instead of going through this.

Sweets, it’s going to get better. You just need to trust that cleaning it and going through a little pain in the beginning will be worth it, he says.

I thought it was all okay. It looked completely normal and healthy whenever I saw it last week. It was closed and almost scabbed. How did it get infected again? I ask.

It didn’t make any sense at all. It shouldn’t have gotten this infected in only a week.

Did you do anything? he asks.

I went and saw you several times. I’ve been walking around the house and I’ve run a couple of errands for mother but nothing too serious. I’ve been taking it very easy and trying not to walk as much.

Did you come in contact with anyone new?

No, I sigh.

I wrack my memories just to be sure but nothing stands out when I think about everything that I’ve done.

Could it be Avira? I ask, letting my mind wander back to my original thoughts.

No. Do not think that way. It might have been just from your dress rubbing up against it. It could have been several different things combined, but do not think about the witch, Kieran says sternly.

But could she do something like this? I ask. Could she do something to make my cut get infected?

She could, but why would she?

Because she can’t get to me right now. She can’t get close to me to ask me where the book is or who you are. Prince Archie said for right now she won’t be able to get close to me. That must have made her angry.

It had to make her furious. If I was in her position I would be so mad. Going from being able to go to whoever and talk to whoever to not being able to get close to one person… yeah that would be infuriating.

If she was going to do something it would be much worse than getting your wound infected. She would want to do something that would put you in so much pain that you wouldn’t be able to do anything, Kieran explains. That’s how she has always been.

Okay, I whisper.

The witch has always been someone who wants to make people suffer. Whenever she has done something, it is always excruciating for her victim. You must have opened up the wound without realizing it and your dress rubbed against it, making it irritated and then it got infected. With some salve and cleaning, it should be healed and new before you know it.

I trust you.

Henry will give you the salve tomorrow morning. It should be enough for this wound to heal and for you to have left over in case something else happens to you, your mother, or your younger brother.

Thank you so much for this. Is there enough salve for other people to have it if they need it? I ask. I feel like I’ve been using up a lot recently and no one else can have any.

What if it’s just like the candy and there isn’t a lot left or it’s hard to make?

We have plenty of salve. This is one thing that we have too much of and you can use as much as you need and want. No one here wants you hurt for a long time and will gladly give you any and all the salve.

If that ever changes you’ll let me know, right? I ask. I don’t want to take more than I should.

I promise I will let you know.

Thank you.

How about you go into bed and I’ll talk to you until you fall asleep? Kieran suggests.

But it’s so early.

You need all the rest you can get. When the curse is broken and things have calmed down we are going to take a week of no interruptions and just get the rest we both need. But you need to sleep right now so you can heal properly.

I push myself off the table and look over at Mother. “I’m going to go lie down and try to get some sleep.”

“Let me know if you need anything,” Mother says as she looks back at me. “Do you need help walking to your room?”

“I think I’m okay,” I mumble.

I grit my teeth with each step I take, my leg burning with intense pain and heat. How am I going to get anywhere when I’m in this much pain?

You aren’t going to. For the next several days you are going to stay in the house and not walk around much. I want that to be healed and you not to be in pain before you come and see me, Kieran tells me.

I need to stop broadcasting my thoughts to you, I grumble. I won’t be able to get away with anything if I subconsciously do that to you.

And I hope you never stop doing it. I want you to always tell me what you’re thinking and I will do the same for you. There are no secrets between us.

Really?

Yes, really. I will answer any questions you want and tell you the truth. And I hope that you will do the same for me if I ever ask you questions.

I’ll try my best.

Now, lay down and close your eyes while I talk to you. You are going to get a good night sleep.

Several days have passed since I found out my leg was infected. Mother has been helping me  clean and put the salve on it. I still can’t bring myself to put it on or even look at it. Will I even be able to look at the scar it leaves behind?

“Is it looking better?” I ask as Mother gently puts the salve on.

“It does. Does it feel better?”

“Not really,” I say through clenched teeth.

“I’m going to put a wrap around it and I want you to go and see him,” Mother says softly. “I want you to get his opinion on it since you don’t want to bring a doctor to the house or go see one.”

“You know why I don’t want to.” I clench the fabric of my dress in my hands as she starts wrapping my leg. “I don’t want to get taken to the palace and not be able to return. While he is being nice right now and not allowing me to see Avira and letting me stay here, he made it very clear that he is still the same prince and I will be under his control when we get married. He won’t allow me to go out to the forest which means he probably won’t allow me to come and see you. I don’t want to start that early.”

And then my life will be over and I will never be able to visit Kieran again.

Mother gently pats my knee. “I understand why you don’t want to, but I’m worried about you. This cut is serious and I wish you would have had the doctor look at it when they first came here.”

“She did look at it and said to clean it regularly and to put medicine on it. Those were her only instructions,” I reply.

Mother sighs. “You know what I mean.”

“I’m sorry. I just wanted to forget about everything,” I mumble.

“It’s okay. I truthfully just wish I had taken better care of you and made sure that you were healing fine,” she whispers. “I seem to be failing at protecting you recently.”

“No, you haven’t.” I place my hand on top of hers.

“Enough of this. Go see him.” Mother stands up and walks out of the bathroom.

I look down at the white bandage around my thigh.

I’m coming to the forest. Mother wants you to look at my thigh or maybe a healer of yours could? I ask.

We’ll be there, he replies.

I push myself off the chair and painfully make my way back to the kitchen and grab my coat.

“You won’t need that today,” Mother says.

“I’m cold though.” I look back at her.

“It’s warmer outside. You will bring attention to yourself if you wear that. But if you are really that cold you can wear it. I just want you to be prepared to get some looks,” Mother tells me.

Sighing, I place it back on the hanger and walk toward the door. “I’ll be back.”

“Take your time!” she calls after me as I walk through the door.

Henry looks down at my thigh before turning to me. “Are you doing better? I haven’t seen you in a couple of days.”

“It still hurts like before but apparently it looks better than it did. I wouldn’t know since I haven’t been able to bring myself to look at it,” I mumble.

“You’ll be able to look at it when the time is right. Don’t force yourself to do something you aren’t ready to do,” Henry says as we start walking.

I grit my teeth and clench the fabric of my dress in my hands as we walk through the town. I’m going to need something to help me walk if it’s going to be this painful for a long time.

Am I going to rip open the cut by walking?

It’s too late now to go back home and talk to my mother about it. It can be something I ask Kieran and the doctor.

Please give me good news, I say in my head as we step into the forest.

“Do you think people are still talking about me?” I ask Henry.

“It has died down, but they still talk about you. You aren’t outside as much as you were before. Some are concerned, and some are spreading rumors about what they think happened to you,” Henry replies. “But once you get back to normal then it will die down even more. There will always be people who will say something to other people, but eventually they won’t care anymore.”

“I hope you’re right,” I whisper, and suck in a deep breath as pain shoots up my leg. “I need to take a second.”

I take several deep breaths through the pain. The thought of hiding my pain from Kieran crosses my mind but I know he has already felt it.

“Are you sure you want to do this?” Henry asks.

“Mother wants me to come and see them. I want to see him. Whenever I’m with him, the pain lessens,” I tell him honestly. “But it does hurt and I don’t know how I’m going to bear the walk back.”

No matter how much time I rest with Kieran, I know the walk back is going to be even more brutal.

“Unless they have some magic that can heal me or take away the pain,” I offer. “But I don’t think they have that.”

Before I can say another word, arms lift me up and I’m staring into those beautiful cobalt blue eyes I love.

“Hello, Sweets.”

CHAPTER 18

“Kieran,” I say, breathless. “What are you doing here so close to the edge of the forest?”

“I heard you talking and I knew you were in pain. I decided to carry you the rest of the way,” he says as he starts walking further into the forest.

“I’ll see you soon,” Henry says, raising his voice as he walks in the opposite direction.

“You didn’t have to risk yourself to come and get me,” I mumble. “I was about to start walking again.”

“I didn’t want you to push yourself too much. You still have the walk back and I won’t be able to help you.”

“But—”

“No more. I have done what I have and there is no going back. I would do it over and over again if it meant giving you a little reprieve from the pain.”

Tears blur my vision and I push my face into his chest, taking in his scent.

“The doctor is here to look at your thigh,” Kieran says as he puts me down on the ground.

“Hello, Adeline. I’m Hayden, one of the many doctors of the Fae. I heard you have a nasty cut on your thigh that is giving you problems. Can I take a look at it?” he asks.

Nodding, I pull my dress up so they can see the bandage. “My mother didn’t want my dress to rub up against it and make it worse.”

“That is very smart of her to do. I have brought a new one to wrap it up with after I take a look at it. Do you want me to take off the bandage or do you want to do it?” He looks up at me, a small smile on his face.

“You.” I gulp. “I can’t look at it.”

“You let me know if it hurts at all,” the doctor tells me. “I will be as gentle as possible.”

I grab Kieran’s hand, squeezing it tightly as the doctor starts taking it off. I look at our conjoined hands, giving all my attention to it.

The healer hums.

“Is it okay?” I ask. “Am I going to lose my leg?”

“You won’t lose your leg, but if we don’t get this under control it may eventually lead to it,” the doctor discloses. “I want you to take extremely good care of it from now on. Clean it twice a day and make sure that you are not walking too much on your leg.”

“Okay,” I whisper.

“You are going to be just fine though. We are going to get you all healed up and brand new, like it never happened.” The doctor gently pats my leg.

“Can you do something similar to my memories as well?” I joke. “Heal it and make all the bad memories go away?”

Tears pool in my eyes and I quickly close them. I just couldn’t keep my mouth shut.

“I’m okay,” I quickly say but my voice is full, a key indicator that I’m about to lose it all and break down.

“Oh, Sweets,” Kieran says gently, wrapping his arms around my upper body. “Everything is going to be okay.”

I bury my face into his chest and grip onto his shirt.

“Sadly I don’t have anything for the memories, but soon they will be distant and you won’t think about them. You are so strong for what you went through,” the doctor says. “And I’m sorry for saying that it would be brand new like it never happened. I shouldn’t have said something like that with what you went through.”

“It’s okay,” I mumble into Kieran’s shirt.

Silence fills around us as the doctor starts to clean my cut. Kieran continues to whisper sweet nothings into my ear every time I wince from the pain.

“All done with the cleaning,” Hayden announces. “It’s looking a lot better than before.”

I turn my head to look at it, but Kieran keeps my head in place.

“Don’t look at it,” he whispers. “Don’t force yourself to look at it.”

Nodding, I bury my face into his shirt again.

“It won’t be full proof, but Kieran is going to put some of his saliva in this bowl with some of the other herbs and salve and we are going to put it back on your cut to help it heal,” the doctor explains.

Right. I completely forgot that somehow Kieran can heal me. I pull away from him and look at the doctor.

Disgust shows on my face. No matter how many times they mention mates can heal each other with their saliva, it will always gross me out.

The doctor chuckles. “Everyone thinks it’s a little weird, but it works and we are going to do it.”

“How did you guys even find out it’s a thing?” I can’t help but ask.

Kieran sits right next to me after he put some of his saliva in the bowl. He pulls my upper half into him so I can’t look at my leg.

“A woman got hurt a long time ago and her mate felt so bad and he wanted her to stop being in pain. They were both scared and worried about each other and the man licked the wound, trying to stop it from bleeding and running onto her clothes and that’s how they found out,” Kieran explains.

“Oh,” I mumble.

“Thought it was going to be something weird?” he asks. “The woman was being hunted and he happened to save her. Sadly she was hurt and he helped her.”

“Wait, why was she being hunted?” I ask, and hiss as the healer starts applying the remedy to my thigh.

“Everything is okay,” Kieran coos at me. “Just focus on me, the doctor is almost finished.”

“Why was she being hunted?” I press.

Kieran chuckles. “She stole some food from a vendor and they were chasing after her. An arrow shot through her arm,” Kieran says.

“Wh-what?” I look up at him in disbelief. “They shot her with an arrow because she stole some food?”

He nods. “They did. They were money hungry and didn’t follow the rules of the law. Don’t worry, they were punished for shooting her with an arrow and hurting her. She had to pay for what she stole.”

“Her mate paid for it,” the doctor interrupts. “It was a huge misunderstanding. They thought she was stealing and she wasn’t. She thought her mate was close by to pay and he wasn’t, so when she grabbed the food and took a bite out of it, the owners demanded payment and she tried to explain but they wouldn’t allow her. That’s when she looked around and ran and everything else happened.”

“Wow,” I whisper. “Did she heal okay?”

“She did and they are still alive to this day,” Kieran says. “Maybe when the curse is broken you can meet them. I have no doubt they would like to meet you.”

“Oh, I don’t know.” I pull away from Kieran.

“Can you hold your thigh up for me?” Hayden asks. “I’m going to bandage it up for you.”

As I pull up my leg, I clench my hands, stopping myself from yelling out in pain.

“Everyone is excited to meet you. Several of them have already begged the High Lord to allow them to come with him whenever he meets with you.” The doctor looks up at me.

“I don’t want to disappoint them so I think it would be better if we don’t meet any new people,” I say, looking back at Kieran.

Kieran gives me a soft smile. “You are not going to disappoint them. They have watched you in town when you thought they weren’t looking. They have heard what you have done for them and for me. They are honored to have you as their High Lady.”

“And that’s what worries me,” I point out.

“You won’t meet all of them at once. They want to make sure that you are comfortable and you won’t disappoint them,” Hayden says as he ties off the wrap. “Is it too tight?”

I shake my head. “I can feel it but it’s not cutting off circulation.”

Hayden stands up. “I am all done here then. It was a pleasure meeting you, Adeline, and I hope we can meet again under better circumstances. Until then, if you have any questions about your thigh, please do not hesitate to ask your mate and he will ask me.”

“Thank you.”

Hayden leaves and I look down at my leg. He wrapped it beautifully and tied a small knot, tucking it in on the side.

“He wasn’t here long. How long has he been a doctor?” I ask, trying to fill the silence.

Kieran moves so he’s kneeling in front of me. “He was a doctor before I was born and had been for a while. He’s one of the few who has been around the longest.”

“He doesn’t look that old,” I mumble to myself. “Will I be like that or am I going to die young?”

“When the curse is broken, we will be able to help you transform part of your soul and body so it will age like the Fae,” Kieran explains.

“I will become Fae?” My eyes widen.

He chuckles and shakes his head. “You won’t become Fae. But your body will change and you will live a long life with me.”

“And it can only happen with mates and not any other person?” I ask, immediately thinking about my mother and younger brother.

“It can only happen through mates,” he says sadly. “It is tough when you’re human. You do have to watch friends and family members die, but you will also make so many new friends and I will make sure to make you happy every single day.”

“I—” I start, but I close my mouth quickly.

I’ve already lost one parent and I know with each passing year my mother could go as well, but to watch my younger brother—twenty-five years younger than me—die is going to be hard. He should outlive me.

“Before I forget.” Kieran stands up and pulls something out of his pocket.

“I forgot to bring the lemons and sugar.” I pout.

“Next time.” Kieran smiles.

“But I wanted them the next time I saw you,” I mumble, and look down at my hands.

Kieran pulls my face up so we are looking at each other.

“It just gives you another reason to see me sooner.” He wiggles his eyebrows. “Here are the herbs I was talking about before,” Kieran says as he hands me a bag. “Just put a little in some tea and let it steep for a while. Then when you’re ready to go to bed, drink some and go lay in bed.”

I look at the bag in my hands, running my thumbs across it before looking back up at Kieran. “What if it doesn’t work?”

What if nothing can help me sleep any better than he can?

He tilts his head to the side. “If it doesn’t work?”

I nod.

“I don’t think anyone has ever asked that. They normally ask what they should do if it works too well,” he hums. “But if it doesn’t work then increase how much you put in and see if that works.”

“What if no matter how much I put in it doesn’t work?” I whisper.

Do I want it to work or am I secretly hoping it doesn’t?

Even though I’m scared out of my mind to be asleep for that long without any protection, I do know that I need sleep or like Kieran said, I may pass out in the worst time possible and be in even more danger.

Kieran cups my face with his hands. “Don’t think like that. It’s going to work. Try it in the morning so that you have Henry outside your house and your mother is awake. If it works then take it again at night to help you sleep. But I don’t want you sleeping during the day and staying awake at night. It’s not good for your health.”

“What if that’s the only way I can sleep?” I can’t help but ask.

I really need to stop asking questions, but I can’t help it. They are just coming out of my mouth before I can stop them.

Whenever I’m worried about something and I’m near Kieran they just come tumbling out, almost like they are begging Kieran to hear them and help me calm down.

“Then we will try something else that can help you sleep during the night. I just want you to try it once in the day so you know how it feels before you try it at night,” Kieran says. “But you are going to overcome this and become stronger. I believe in you.”

“If only you could sneak into the house at night,” I mumble. “I can easily fall asleep next to you. My whole body just relaxes, like it knows you will take care of everything and I don’t have to worry about anything.”

Now I just want to feel like that every single day, all day.

Kieran kisses my forehead. “And I’m glad your body and mind know that because it’s true. When you are with me you don’t need to worry about anything or be on alert.”

CHAPTER 19

“Do you think they are any closer to finding out how to break the curse?” I mumble to myself as I sit in the kitchen.

Mother turns her head to me. “What was that?”

I shake my head. “Nothing.”

But it’s everything. I’ve been constantly thinking about this any time my mind starts to go blank. It’s something that I am constantly worried about and never feel at ease about.

Mother cocks her hip to the side and places her hand there, arching an eyebrow as she looks at me. “We are not starting this again. You know that I am here for you if you need to talk about things. Now, what’s got you so worked up and worried?”

“They have something that can help them, but they need to translate it and I’m just curious if they have found anything,” I whisper. “I’m worried and anxious. I want them to figure it out so that things can change around here and I don’t have to be so worried. I want them to figure it out so that he and I can be together and both of us can be at peace and not constantly worried that something is going to happen to one another.”

She walks over to me and gently places a hand on my shoulder. “Everything is going to be okay. Why don’t you go lie down and get some sleep? Try the herbs he gave you to see if it works.”

Sighing, I nod. “Okay.”

“Have you figured out how to break the curse yet?” I ask as I lay my head on Kieran’s chest.

It’s been a month since the cut on my thigh really started to heal. All thanks to the healer that Kieran brought with him when Mother wanted me to get it checked out.

But even with another month going by, my mind still hasn’t recovered ,while my body slowly has. Every little noise makes me flinch, waiting for someone to come at me and cause me pain.

When will I get over this?

Sleep hasn’t come any easier either. I’ve taken the herbs Kieran has given me and did what he told me step by step, but nothing seems to work. The only way I’ve been able to fall asleep is when I’m with Kieran.

There is just something about being near him that allows my body to fully calm down and be able to fall asleep. Probably because he’s Fae and my mate. He’ll do anything to keep me safe.

Kieran runs his hands up and down my arm, almost putting me to sleep. “We are still trying to translate it. We have not used this language in a long time and everyone outside of the wall is rusty on it. We know bits and pieces of it, but there are a lot of words that we do not know.”

Dread forms in my stomach and I close my eyes, trying to block out every little direction my mind wants to go with that information. It’s been almost three months since I was released from the dungeon, and it doesn’t feel like we are getting any closer to figuring out how to break it.

My fingers curl around his shirt. “We need to figure it out soon. I don’t know when she is going to come for me again. She knows that I took the book, even though I’ve denied it, and has been showing up at random to ask me.”

There’s only so much I can withstand before I completely break.

“She has been appearing even though the prince told her not to?” Kieran asks.

“Yes.” My voice breaks. “She is the witch, but only a few people know that. Prince Archie isn’t one of them.”

“And you haven’t told him?”

I shake my head. “No, because when he told me he would keep her away, he also told me soon after that I’m going to have to get used to being around her. That once I move into the palace there is no way for me to not run into her. He essentially said to get used to the fact that she did that and everyone thinks she’s still my sister and won’t do it again.”

I quickly wipe the tears from my face.

“She isn’t going to do anything to you,” Kieran says firmly. “She will not take you again. We are going to have the cure before any of that happens.”

“Even before the wedding?” I can’t help but ask.

Even though Prince Archie pushed it back by a year, it’s still hanging over my head, and each month that passes is just another month closer to the dreadful day.

Kieran kisses the top of my head. “Even before the wedding. The only person you are going to get married to is me.”

“I trust you,” I whisper.

His arms tighten around me and I slowly let out a breath.

“Any time you want to know about the progress, you just let me know. There are a lot of spells and how to break them in the book. We don’t want to randomly do a remedy and it not be for the curse and waste our time. So, we are trying to go through all the pages and translate the titles to figure out which one is the one we need,” Kieran explains.

“I’m sorry,” I mumble into his chest.

“Why, Sweets?”

The guilt inside me is growing with each second I’m silent.

“Sweets?” Kieran sits up, taking me with him.

He cups my face with his hands before I can do anything and makes me look at him.

“Why are you sorry?” he asks again.

“Because I was being so inconsiderate of how hard it was going to be. I was being impatient and kept asking if you had gotten closer, not realizing that there were other spells in there. I thought it was the one spell and that was all,” I reply honestly.

How could I be so naive in this situation.

He runs his thumbs across my cheeks, giving me a small smile. “It’s okay. I didn’t tell you because I didn’t want you to worry, but now I understand that it was a mistake and I won’t do that again.”

Shaking my head, I pull out of his hands. “No, it is me who should keep apologizing. I know you guys have a lot of eyes on you and you can’t work on it every moment of the day. I know that you have to be extremely careful and I keep forgetting that. You don’t have to just worry about Avira but you also have to worry about the guards. If only I knew the language then I could help you.”

“No,” he replies.

“What?” I tilt my head.

“Even if you knew the language I wouldn’t allow you to do it. You’ve seen how Avira reacted when she found out. I am glad you don’t know the language so that you aren’t part of this anymore. If you were trying to help it would put you in more danger, and I wouldn’t be okay with that,” Kieran says. “I would be constantly worried about you and if Avira would come after you.”

“But I helped before,” I point out.

“Yes, you did, but do you know how worried I was the whole time? Every day I woke up worried that something bad was going to happen to you that day and I wouldn’t be able to do anything about it.” Kieran locks eyes with me. “It was a constant worry in my mind that you would get taken away and I would have no idea. And then it finally happened. I could feel your fear but I couldn’t do a single thing about it. And when I knew where you were, I couldn’t go to you and get you out. I had to wait until something happened.”

I never knew that was how he felt.

“How come I couldn’t feel it though?” I ask before realization dawns on me. “You kept it hidden? I thought you promised we wouldn’t do that!”

Hurt flashes through me when Kieran looks at me apologetically. I thought something was up when I couldn’t feel his emotions at all. For a while I thought it was just him being able to feel it since he was Fae, but every once in a while I would feel them. And when I did it made me think he may not be feeling too many emotions strongly.

But I was wrong.

He was hiding them from me and I never had any idea.

“I didn’t want you to worry about me and be more anxious. I needed you to be focused so you didn’t mess up.” He looks up into the sky. “Back then I had a feeling that if you knew how worried I was about you that you would get nervous and then doubt everything you did. I wasn’t ever doubting your capability of getting the book and finding a way to get out of the marriage. I was worried that you would get caught and something bad would happen to you. And I was right with what I was feeling. If I could go back to stop you from finding the book then I would. I never wanted you to get beaten and threatened.”

I take a step back from him, tears lining my eyes.

“You promised that you would never do that.” My voice breaks.

“Sweets.” He takes a step toward me but I hold my hand up, stopping him.

“I know I kept it from you when I was getting hurt because I didn’t want you to feel the pain and get angry, doing something that would put you in harms way,” I whisper. “But I stopped doing it. I thought you weren’t feeling strong emotions and to find out that it is all a lie now… I don’t know how to feel.”

“Adeline,” he says gently.

“I need a second,” I tell him.

“Adeline, are you ready to go back?” Henry asks as he walks into the clearing.

I quickly wipe away the tears from my face and turn away from Kieran.

“We need a couple more minutes,” Kieran says.

“I’ll talk to you later. I’m not giving up on us, but I need a couple of minutes or hours to fully wrap my brain around everything.” I turn to Kieran briefly before looking over at Henry.

Henry looks between us and takes a step back. “I can give you a couple more minutes to talk things through but not many more than that.”

I shake my head. “We can come back tomorrow. I’ll be ready tomorrow.”

I have no idea if I will actually be ready to see Kieran tomorrow, but right now I know if I stay anywhere close to him I’m going to end up forgetting about what he did behind my back. I want to be able to process it now rather than let it fester inside some for who knows how long and take it out on him later.

“Kieran, we’ll talk more about it tomorrow. I just need a couple of hours to really think about it,” I whisper. “I don’t want to say something that I am going to regret later.”

“I understand,” Kieran replies. “I’ll be available if you want to talk tonight, and if not then I will see you tomorrow.”

I take a shaky breath and slowly start walking back to town with Henry right next to me. My heart tugs with each step I take. All I want to do is run back to Kieran and wrap my arms around him and say anything and everything that comes to mind.

But we don’t have time for that, and I may say something that I’m going to regret later. Once words are said, you can’t take them back.

“Is everything okay?” Henry asks as we get closer to the house.

I shrug my shoulders and pick at the hangnail.

“Whatever it is, if you need to talk about it I’m here. You two are going to make it through,” he says.

“Thanks,” I mumble.

I walk into the house without another word and immediately go into my room and sit at the end of my bed, looking at the white wall in front of me.

Every single emotion is going through my mind as I replay what he did. He kept his emotions a secret even after he said we weren’t going to hide them. Part of me can understand what he was doing since I did something similar, but he was in the know when I hid them from him.

I was completely in the dark.

Will he do this later when the curse is broken? Will he hide things away from me in other areas?

I know I shouldn’t be thinking this way, but I can’t help but let my mind wonder about them. He has done it once and it becomes easier every single time you do it.

Tears of frustration roll down my face and I angrily wipe them off my face.

“How could you do something like this?” I whisper to myself as I lie back in my bed.

“Do what?” Mother asks as she sits down on the side of my bed.

CHAPTER 20

“Idon’t want to talk about it,” I mumble and close my eyes.

Mother gently runs her hand up and down my arm. “Whenever you are ready to talk about it, I’m here for you. I may not know a lot about them or the situation you are going through, but sometimes talking them out will help reveal things to yourself and make them clear.”

“Thanks, but I think I’m going to rest here for a little bit,” I whisper.

She pats my shoulder before getting up and leaving my room. I roll over onto my side and take a deep breath. Should I talk to her about it, or should I try and talk to Kieran and let him hear all of my unfiltered thoughts?

I’m sorry for acting the way I did, I mumble through the bond.

Even though I need time away from him to think through everything, it’s impossible for me to actually not talk to him. I want to be near him every second of the day, and I want to constantly be talking to him as well.

Sweets, it’s alright. I didn’t mean to keep it a secret from you, but I also didn’t want to tell you like this. I wanted to tell you when we had time to talk it through, he replies. Why don’t you get some rest? I can hum to help you.

Please.

“Were you able to get more sleep last night?” Mother asks.

I shake my head. I fell asleep rather quickly when Kieran was humming to me, but I was plagued with nightmares and woke up several times.

“Thinking about what happened yesterday?” She gets busy making some breakfast.

“Yes and no. When I was awake it was on my mind but it wasn’t the reason I woke up.”

Or maybe it was and I’m just lying to myself. Some of the nightmares were different than normal. They were centered around Kieran and him dying in front of me, or him telling me he doesn’t want anything to do with me anymore.

Either way, I was awake for the majority of the night and thinking about Kieran one way or the other.

“Are you going to go talk to him about what is bothering you?” she asks.

“I want to, but I’m worried I’m going to say something wrong and won’t be able to take it back,” I reply.

That is another thing I was worried about all throughout the night whenever I thought about what Kieran did to me. It hurt me badly to know that he did something like that right after he promised me he wouldn’t… that we wouldn’t.

“Then before you start talking, tell him that your thoughts are all over the place and he will listen. If he truly loves you he will patiently hear you out, and if you speak calmly you should be okay,” Mother explains. “But you also need to be prepared to hear his side of it as well. It is a two way street and you won’t be the only one explaining things and listening.”

I sigh and lean back in my chair. “I know, and I do want to hear his side more. He told me some of it yesterday but my mind was so overwhelmed that I wasn’t paying much attention to what he was saying.”

Mother gently pats my shoulder. “And that’s okay. I’ve been the same exact way when your father told me things. You needed time to cool off and wrap your brain around everything.”

Nodding, I look over at the baby but quickly divert my eyes. Every single day it seems like he looks more like our father. Am I ever going to be able to look at him without the guilt eating me alive? What are we going to tell him when he grows up and asks where his father is?

“How about you go see him after you eat breakfast,” Mother suggests.

“We have several things to do around the house. My thigh is a lot better and we need to focus on getting caught up so we can make sure to have food on the table,” I reply. “I’ll see him in the afternoon.”

“Why not now?” she asks. “The chores can wait until the afternoon when you are done talking to him.”

“Because they have some sort of roll call in the morning.”

“How would you know that?” she asks, placing her hand on her hip.

I open and close my mouth several times. I know that because when I almost died in the snow he saved me and I spent the night with him.

“He told me about it,” I say hesitantly.

Mother’s eyes narrow on me, but she ultimately turns around and finishes up the breakfast.

“Whatever you say.” She starts whistling and my cheeks heat up.

“Have you guys worked it out yet?” Henry asks.

“Why is everyone worried about him and I and if we have made up?” I fire back.

“You two are important people. Everyone is worried when you guys look upset and don’t talk to each other,” he explains.

“Kieran was upset?” My eyebrows bunch together.

“From what Zahra told me, he was upset at himself for making you cry and angry. He was mad at himself and not at you,” he repeats.

Was that why when I felt anger it seemed to fester and grow, because I was feeling his as well? He was finally letting me feel his own feelings?

“Did she say anything else?” I ask, trying to sound like I don’t care too much but am curious.

Henry smiles. “Worried about him?”

“Even if I’m angry at him, I will always be worried in some way,” I reply, not being able to hold my true feelings in. “We are mates and he is constantly on my mind. I’m worried that he is going to take something the wrong way and it’s going to create this huge division between us. I’m worried that even though I need time he is going to think that I don’t want to be his mate any longer, which isn’t true.”

“Talk to him and see if he did anything else,” Henry says before walking off to the right.

Mouth hanging open, I watch his figure get farther away.

“Wait, where are you going?” I call after him and take a step, but I’m stopped when a hand grabs mine.

“He is giving us some privacy so we can talk about things,” Kieran says.

My head whirls toward him. “When did you get here?” I ask. “What did you hear?”

A small smile forms on his face. “You trying to act like you care but not care too much. But you want to know something?”

I nod and he leans forward, his mouth mere centimeters away from my ear.

“You are terribly at trying to act like you don’t care while also being very curious,” he whispers.

My face flushes and I look away as he pulls back.

“Don’t be embarrassed now. It was quite cute,” he replies.

“Everyone was worried about us, and hearing it from Henry just made me curious,” I mumble.

“And made you a little worried about me,” he states.

“I never said that!” I raise my voice as I turn to him.

“But I could feel the emotions. They don’t lie through the bond. No matter how hard you try to change it for the other person.” Kieran wraps his arms around me and holds me close. “It’s okay. I was never mad at you. I was mad at myself for causing you so much pain when you are already going through a lot.”

“To be honest I don’t think you telling me any way would have made me not angry at you and a little hurt inside,” I tell him. “I know I’ve done it to you when I was getting tortured, but you knew about it so it feels a tiny bit different. I think I was more hurt that you lied about it.”

He hums and runs his hands up and down my back.

“I think I was hurt that you didn’t trust me enough to tell me at the time. I know you were worried about me and how I was going to react if I felt all your worries, but I would have understood if you told me you didn’t want me to feel your emotions. I would have asked you to explain and I would hope that I would have been okay with it,” I continue.

“But if you knew that I was constantly worried about you, would that have been on your mind even if I told you that I had full confidence in you?” he asks.

I pull back slightly and look up at Kieran. “I don’t know. I honestly don’t know if it would have been on my mind or if I would have been too busy to really pay attention to those thoughts.”

We’ll never know now. But Kieran did what he thought was best at the moment and maybe he was right to do it. I just wish he hadn’t.

Kieran cups my face. “From now on we will tell each other if we have to close our feelings and pain, understand?”

I nod.

“Words.”

“Yes, Kieran. I understand.”

He runs his thumb back and forth. “But we are going to try our hardest not to hide them.”

“Correct,” I agree with him.

Kieran pulls me back into chest. “I’m sorry for hurting you.”

“It’s okay,” I mumble into his chest. “It hurt, but I do see why you did it.”

Kieran kisses the top of my head and holds me.

“My mother was worried about me last night when I came home. Henry seemed worried when we were walking here,” I say, trying to make conversation.

“Every Fae was worried as well. They kept asking me if you were alright and what had happened,” Kieran chuckles. “I thought I was about to get disowned for a couple of days because I had hurt you.”

I shake my head and pull away from Kieran. “They wouldn’t actually do that, would they?” I ask.

“I think they would. They care about you a lot and were giving me disapproving looks wherever I walked. I knew what I did was wrong, but they were making sure I also knew it at every opportunity.”

“So that means in the future you will never be able to get away with anything?” I ask cheekily as I wiggle my eyebrows at him.

“You are not going to get me in trouble on purpose.” He gives me a pointed look.

“I would never,” I chuckle. “I was just thinking about the future and in case you did something like this again.”

“Just you wait until it’s your turn and you get all the stares and questions from them.” He gently flicks my forehead. “Then you aren’t going to be laughing.”

“They would never do that to me.” I smile. “They love me too much to give me looks.”

Kieran shakes his head. “Just you wait. Some day you are going to do something to me, and when you walk around they are going to know and will give you looks. Don’t come running to me when they do.”

“Why would I run to you when we are in an argument?” I ask.

“Because I thought about calling out to you several times to come and talk to me so we could resolve it so I wouldn’t get any more stares. I knew what I did was wrong and they were making sure that I knew it every second until you came back and we resolved this.”

“It couldn’t have been that bad,” I mumble.

Kieran gently touches the side of my head and several different memories play in my mind… all of the Fae giving Kieran knowing looks, little glares, and telling him to fix it.

“Oh my,” I whisper as he pulls back. “I never thought it was that bad.”

“Just you wait until it’s your turn. Then I’ll be laughing at you,” he says.

I shake my head. “You won’t be laughing at me.”

He sighs and chuckles. “You’re right. First I’ll make sure that you are okay and take care of you. Then we will talk about the argument we had.”

“Can we promise each other something?” I ask.

He hums and cocks his head to the side.

“Can we not go to bed after an argument or if we are mad at each other. I don’t like the feeling and I don’t want to have any regret when it comes to life. What if something were to happen during the night and we left everything on an argument? What if we⁠—”

Kieran kisses my lips. “I promise.”

CHAPTER 21

“Adeline,” Avira whispers in my ear. “Did you really think you could get away from me that easily?”

I whirl around, my eyes moving as I try to find where she is in this black pit. But everywhere I turn I just see black.

Where am I?

What happened to me?

“Prince Archie told you not to get close to me,” I yell, fear coursing through my body. “When he hears about this he won’t be happy.”

Laughter fills the air, sending shivers running up and down my body. I need to find Henry or Prince Archie. But as I walk further, the black doesn’t go anywhere.

“Do you think a mere prince can keep me away from you? He is no match for me.” Avira pops out right in front of me.

I scream and trip, taking several steps back as I try to widen the distance between us.

“Get away from me!” I yell. “You aren’t supposed to be close to me!”

But she’s right. What can Prince Archie do against her when she’s the witch? No one is as strong as she is.

She chuckles and I continue to take several steps back. Avira snaps her fingers and I’m held in place.

“Avira, you don’t have to do this. I have done nothing to you!” I beg and plead. “Just let me go and let’s pretend like nothing ever happened!”

I continue to try and move, but it’s like there is an invisible force around me, holding me in place.

“Done nothing?” Her head tilts to the side as she gets closer to me. “Oh, Adeline, you have done so much. Stealing my book of spells, falling in love with a Fae, and always being suspicious of me.”

She takes several steps toward me and I beg my body to allow me to move but it’s rooted in its spot. All I can do is watch in horror as Avira lifts her finger and gently runs it down my cheek.

The hairs on my body stand up straight as unease fills my body.

Kieran! I call through our bond, trying to get his attention.

Silence.

Kieran! Please find me! Kieran! Answer me! I continue, but it’s no use.

Where has Avira taken us? Why can’t I see anything but her?

“You should have just kept your head down and married the prince. You shouldn’t have gotten involved with the Fae and let them brainwash you,” Avira says sadly. “You should have just ignored them. But it’s too late now.”

“Please, Avira,” I manage to get out. “Just let me go and I won’t tell anyone a thing.”

Tsking, Avira shakes her head and looks at my thigh. “You know I can’t allow that. You have seen and heard too much and now you’re a liability. Who knows what you will do once I let you go. Will you go tell the other townspeople to try and get them to revolt against the royals? Will you get the Fae to bear arms and fight for their freedom?”

“I haven’t breathed a word of anything, you have to believe me. I can continue to keep my mouth shut,” I beg her. “I’ll keep my mouth shut, head down, and I’ll marry the prince next year. Just please let me go. I have done nothing wrong!”

Lie.

By that point the Fae will hopefully be free and the royal family, along with Avira, will be dead or locked away somewhere they won’t ever be able to get out of.

But will Avira ever be put somewhere where she can’t get out of or use her magic to harm people?

The thought terrifies me.

She hums and walks around me. “Too late. You had your chance and you decided to meddle in things, so now I have to get rid of you. The prince will find someone who will be happy to marry him and will follow every little word he says without complaint or hesitation.”

“Avira, please don’t,” I whisper, tears filling my eyes. “I don’t want to die right now. From now on I will follow every little word he says without any complaint or hesitation.”

Another lie.

She chuckles. “Lies. I know you are lying about this and everything else. You won’t be dying right now. I’m going to make sure your death is slow and painful. You are going to wish that you never took the book from me or fell in love with a Fae.”

“I’ll do anything. Please just don’t kill me. I’m not ready to die!” I scream.

Kieran! Please answer me! Please tell me that you can get to me and save me! Kieran! I scream through the bond.

“Anything?” Avira asks as she tilts her head to the side.

I manage to nod my head. Maybe if I can keep her stalling for some time then Kieran can come and save me.

Please, Kieran. Please if you can hear me then follow my voice and save me! I beg through the bond.

“Yes,” I whisper.

But I know that’s a lie.

I’m not ready to leave Kieran behind. We haven’t even been able to have a proper life together. It’s all had to be in secret, and I also don’t want to leave my mother behind. She shouldn’t lose two people she loves in less than a year.

How will she move on with her life after everything has come to light?

“You’ll tell me where the book is?” Avira asks.

My mouth stays shut and she chuckles.

“That’s what I thought. You aren’t willing to do anything after all,” she says. “Lucky for you I still remember a couple of the spells, and one just happens to be a spell I need to make you suffer.”

Remember a couple of the spells? Does she not have them memorized? That wouldn’t make sense. She is older than Kieran is, she has to have everything memorized.

“First you are going to lose your leg and then it’s going to spread throughout your whole body. But it won’t be quick.” Avira laughs. “Oh, how I’m going to have so much fun watching you slowly die. And when other people realize what is happening to you, they won’t be able to do anything.”

Before I can ask her questions, searing, blinding pain erupts on my thigh.

Shooting out of bed, I scream as my thigh is on fire. Mother bursts into the room, searching with her gaze before landing on my frame.

“What’s wrong?” Mother asks. “Tell me what’s wrong!”

I grip my thigh as tears and another wave of pain crashes through me.

Sweets! What’s wrong? Kieran’s voice cuts through all of the pain and rings through my head. Where are you? Talk to me, Sweets.

“My thigh,” I cry out.

Mother pulls up my dress and gasps. “Oh my.”

I bring myself to look down and see a bloody mess all over my thigh and dripping onto my bed. Black dots form in my vision as I continue to stare at it.

So much blood.

Everywhere.

Why is there so much blood?

Mother runs out of my room for several minutes before coming back in with needles, thread, cloths, and bandages in her hands.

“Bite down on this.” She hands me a cloth. “Bite down on it and lie back down. Don’t look while I sew your thigh up. Everything is going to be okay.”

Adeline, what’s going on? Why are you in so much pain? Kieran asks again.

Blood. Everywhere. Thigh, I manage to get out.

Tears roll down my face as I lie back down on the bed, biting the cloth so hard I’m afraid I’m going to break a tooth.

“Everything is going to be okay,” Mother repeats. “I’m going to get started.”

Adeline, what are you talking about? What happened to your thigh? His voice gets louder in my head. Tell me what’s going on. Is there anything I can do to help you?

Avira did it, I manage to get out before Mother slowly starts sewing up my thigh, sending blinding pain throughout my body.

Screaming, I bite into the cloth even harder, my hands gripping my bedsheet as I will myself not to beg her to stop.

“You’re doing alright.” Mother’s voice shakes. “We’re almost done.”

Lie.

She just started, and with how big the cut is, there is no way she’s almost done. Black dots scatter across my vision as she continues to work on my thigh.

“We’re almost done,” she says again. “Everything is going to be okay.”

I go in and out of consciousness as she continues to work. Kieran is still talking to me, but I don’t have the strength to reply to him.

I don’t have the strength to do anything.

“We’re all done,” Mother says gently as she pulls the cloth out of my mouth. “I’ve managed to stitch you up and stop the bleeding.”

Her voice is shaky as she sits next to my head, running her bloody hands through my hair.

“What happened?” she whispers, but I stay silent.

Mother sighs and continues to run her hands through my hair as we sit in silence, processing everything that just happened.

“How about we go get you cleaned up,” Mother suggests. “It will make you feel a lot better, and then you can rest in the kitchen while I clean everything up.”

“How are you going to get that out of the sheets without people whispering?” I manage to ask as she helps me sit up.

“We are going to do it in the house where no one can see. No doubt people heard you scream, but they will just think it’s from your nightmares like before,” Mother explains. “And if they ask questions then we will come up with a lie. Everything is going to work out.”

Mother helps me out of the bed and stands on the side of my hurt leg, helping me hop all the way to the bathroom.

“You just sit here and relax while I take care of everything,” she says. “Don’t think about anything but happy thoughts.”

Easier said than done. My mind is whirling with so many questions and thoughts from everything that has happened so far. But the most important one keeps lingering in my mind.

How was Avira able to get to me through a dream and cut my thigh?

CHAPTER 22

Pale.

My face is pale as I stare at it through the mirror. Everything spins around me as I grip onto the counter, looking away from my pathetic image.

“Let’s get some food in your body,” Mother says. “I’ll help you to the table where you can rest.”

And she does exactly that, my whole world spinning even more as I sit down. I limp the whole way down, pain shooting up and down my leg with each step I take on it.

“You are going to need to be careful with your leg,” Mother reminds me. “You don’t want to pop the stitches.”

“Okay,” I mumble.

Sweets, talk to me. What happened back there? Did Avira visit you in the middle of the night? Kieran asks.

It was a dream. I manage to fight the black dots threatening to pull me under. I never thought she could do so much damage through a dream.

Fear courses through me, and a sense of calm washes over my body, but it does nothing to take the fear away.

Kieran is trying to comfort me.

I knew I should have never taken the herbs or fallen asleep to begin with. What I was so worried about actually came true.

What did she do to you in your dream? he asks. What did she say?

So many things, I whisper as I lean my head on the table, not having the energy to keep it up any longer.

I’m never going to be able to go back into my room and fall asleep again. I don’t think I ever want to step foot back in there when everything is replaying in my head so vividly.

“Come on, let’s get you fed and then you can go lie down,” Mother says.

“I don't know if I can stomach any food,” I manage to get out. “Everything is so weak and I don’t have the energy.”

“Then let me be your energy. All you have to do is swallow,” she replies as she sits right next to me. “I’ll feed you.”

She places the bowl on the table before helping me sit up.

Can you tell me more? Kieran asks. Maybe there is something we can do to make sure that she can never reach you again, but I need to know everything that happened.

Can you just read my mind? I ask. Look back into my memories and see what happened? I don’t want to relive it.

But I’m constantly reliving it right now. Flashes of the dream keep appearing in my vision.

I can only do that if I see you in person. I don’t want you walking right now. I can feel how weak you are. Eat and get some rest. I’m here if you need anything.

Tears shimmer in my eyes and I blink them away before turning my focus to Mother.

“I know, Adeline, but everything is going to be okay. You are going to rest and get better, I promise,” she whispers.

Then what was Avira talking about when she said the people around me would notice too late? She couldn’t have possibly meant that I would die from blood loss, could she?

“I’m sorry.” I choke on my words.

“Hush. You have nothing to be sorry for. I just want you to eat something and get some rest. Your sole focus should be on healing right now,” Mother replies.

She slowly feeds me the porridge and I force myself to swallow every spoonful she gives me.

“How about you go rest in my room,” Mother says as she gets up and places the bowl in the sink. “Just rest in there while I do things around the house.”

While she cleans up the bloody mess in my room.

“I don’t know if I can fall asleep in this house again,” I say honestly. “This is exactly what I was worried about.”

Mother cups my face with her warm hands. It’s not the same as when Kieran does it, and I deeply miss it.

“You are going to make it through this no matter what. And if we need to move houses then we can.”

I shake my head. “There is no way we would be able to afford moving houses.”

Not when this house has been in my mother’s family for generations. She grew up here, lost her husband, and had two kids. I can’t drag her away from this, no matter how much it pains me to be here.

“If it is going to help you move on and be able to sleep, then we will. I have no doubt that there is someone else who wants to trade houses,” Mother explains.

“She can still reach me if we go to another house. It won’t matter. We won’t be able to move houses every single time she comes in my dreams or sees me in person. It will be impossible and it will slow down our business.”

Mother sighs.

“I want to go to the forest,” I whisper.

She looks at me shocked. “I don’t know if you have the strength to get to the forest. How about you wait until later. Maybe tomorrow or the day after that when your body has fully recovered from the blood loss.”

“I need to see him and explain what happened. He can feel everything,” I tell her. “He is worried and I need to ease him before he tries to do something dumb.”

“I don’t know,” she mumbles and looks down at my thigh, something flashing in her eyes. “Adeline, what happened last night? Nothing is making any sense.”

The horror shows in her eyes as she continues to stare at my thigh. The same horror I am feeling every single time I’m thinking about the dream and the pain that still lingers in my leg.

“I’m trying to figure that out as well, but I need to see him,” I repeat. “He knows way more about this than I do.”

Mother runs her hands across her face, taking in a deep breath. “You are far too weak to go to the forest and I won’t be able to help you. Not unless you want it to look suspicious and be put on everyone’s radar.”

“Then I’ll walk there with Henry like I did before,” I declare. “I know I’m going to get attention for how I look but he may be able to help me.”

He has to help me. I don’t know what else to do or how I’m going to survive this if she can come into my dreams and harm me.

“I don’t like this,” Mother mumbles.

“I don’t either but he may be able to help, and I have to try. I won’t be able to rest until I talk to him and try to come up with some type of solution,” I say.

Kieran has to know something about what happened to me and how we can prevent it from happening again.

But what if he doesn’t?

“Okay.” Mother pulls me out of my thoughts. “Take a bag with you with some food and water so if you get light headed you can eat something.”

I watch her as she quickly gets a bag and fills it with some food and water.

“It’s not heavy. And please be careful when you are walking there.” Mother hands me the bag and helps me stand up.

We slowly make our way to the door and Henry stares right at me, his mouth hanging open.

“What happened to you?” he asks.

“You will need to help her walk,” Mother says. “She can’t put much pressure on her right leg and you need to watch out in case she passes out.”

Henry shakes his head. “You shouldn’t be out walking in this condition. Please, go back inside.”

“Henry, no,” I say firmly. “I need to see him.”

He searches my face and sighs. “Okay, but if you get worse it’s not on me. I told you to go back inside.”

I glare at him. “I know that. You don’t have to remind me.”

Henry holds his arm out and I grip onto it.

“Be safe,” Mother says.

“Sit and he’ll be here soon,” Henry says as he helps me down.

The skin around my eyes crinkles as my leg protests with the movement. It’s on fire from all the walking.

Henry leaves and I see Kieran run toward me in the corner of my eye.

“Sweets, are you okay?” he asks as he kneels beside me. “What happened? Why were you in so much pain today? Why did you scream? Talk to me.”

“I’m okay,” I whisper as I place my hand on top of his.

Lie.

“Don’t lie to me.” Kieran gives me a glare. “I know you aren’t alright. I can feel how much pain you are in right now. What happened last night?”

“I don’t know if I can say it. I don’t know if I can relive everything that I went through.” I close my eyes. “Can you just look at my memories?”

He nods. “You won’t see anything.”

I keep my eyes closed as he places his hands on the sides of my head.

“Adeline,” he mumbles.

“I don’t know how she got into my dreams,” I whisper as I look up at him. “How?”

“First off, are you okay?” he asks. “How is your thigh? How are you feeling? You’ve lost a lot of blood.”

“I feel weak and in pain,” I reply. “You saw that Mother stitched me up, but I haven’t been able to look at my thigh since then.”

Kieran sits on the ground and pulls me into his lap, holding me close to him.

“Could you hear me in my dream?” I ask.

“Yes.” His voice sounds so broken.

“Why didn’t you reply?” I look up at him.

“I wasn’t able to. I tried so many times.” Kieran slowly rocks us back and forth. “To be able to hear you begging me to get you out from wherever you were and not being able to do anything is my worst nightmare.”

“You could hear me?” I ask, shocked.

“I could hear every word you said. I could hear you begging me and the fear you felt as you went through everything,” he says. “But when I asked some Fae if you had left, they said no. Then I heard your scream but I wasn’t able to do anything.”

“I’m sorry.”

“I felt so helpless as I watched from afar, wondering if you were okay and alive. I couldn’t get through to you until after you screamed.” His voice holds no emotion as he talks.

“When I woke up,” I whisper.

“What happened?” he asks.

“I—” I stop myself and take a deep breath, trying to calm myself down. “I don’t know. I went to sleep after you hummed to me and then all of a sudden Avira was talking to me and everything was black. I couldn’t find anyone or get out. Then she appeared in front of me and I couldn’t move,” I ramble. “I thought it was a nightmare but it felt way too real.”

“Did you eat or drink anything when you got back to the house?” he asks.

“I don’t remember,” I mumble. “Everything inside of my head is all jumbled up and it’s hard for me to recall things.”

Kieran tightens his arms around me. “Everything is going to be okay. She isn’t going to get to you again.”

“I can’t fall asleep in the house. I can’t fall asleep ever again. Not until she is dead. What if she comes to me again? She could slit my throat in the dream and no one would know until the morning,” I say in one breath.

The terror running through me with these thoughts is overwhelming. If she can reach me in my dreams then she can do anything and I won’t be able to stop her.

How is anyone safe?

“Sweets, I want you to listen to me,” Kieran says sternly. “Look into my eyes and listen to my words, and only my words.”

I lock gazes with him and it’s just like before where everything disappears around me and I only focus on his cobalt blue eyes.

“While she is a witch, there are limitations in this realm to what she can do. She must have given you something without you knowing so she could penetrate your dreams. It’s not going to happen again,” he states.

“How do you know it won’t?” I whisper. “She managed to do it this time without us knowing and hurt me. The next time I don’t think she is going to go easy on me.”

Kieran kisses my forehead. “You have to trust me.”

“I do,” I mumble and lean my forehead on his chest.

“I’m going to talk to one of the healers and see if they can come up with something to keep you safe from this happening again.”

“Thanks,” I say weakly.

My body is absolutely exhausted from everything, and being near Kieran isn’t helping either.

“Now will you allow me to take care of you?” he asks.

“What can you do?” I pull back slightly and look up at him.

“Give you some of my blood.”

CHAPTER 23

“Give me some of your blood?” I repeat his words.

He nods.

“Are we even the same blood type?” I ask.

He nods again.

“How do you know? Please respond with words.” I sigh.

He chuckles and pushes a piece of hair behind my ear. “My little impatient, Sweets,” he mumbles as he looks at me. “What am I going to do with you?”

“Tell me how you know and stop stalling.” I narrow my eyes on him.

He lifts his hands in the air. “Okay. I’ll tell you.”

We stare at each other and I patiently wait for him to start talking.

“Kieran,” I say, sighing. “Please just tell me before I pass out or need to go back home.”

“I know we are the same blood type because mates can do that with each other, especially if one of them is Fae. Our blood is different than yours. Allow me to give you some of my blood so you aren’t dizzy and extremely weak from the blood loss,” he says.

I open and close my mouth several times as I stare at him.

“We can do what?” I ask, cocking my head to the side.

“We can give each other blood. Though it will do nothing to me if you give me some of your blood, but if I were to give you some of mine, then it can help tremendously,” he explains.

“Will it have any other effects on me?” I ask.

Will I turn into a Fae slowly from this? Will I grow wings and have no idea until the curse is broken? Will I even be under the curse since I wouldn’t be a pure blood Fae.

“How do Fae react to half-blood Fae?” I blurt out before I can stop myself.

Kieran blinks several times. “Wh-what?”

“Nothing.” I shake my head. “Will me getting your blood have any other effects on me?”

“We are not done with this conversation.” His eyes narrow on me. “It is not going to turn you into a Fae if that is what you are wondering.”

“Then what will it do?” I ask, growing frustrated with him not answering my questions.

Is he purposefully doing this to me?

“The sooner you give me the answers in more detail, the sooner we may actually do this,” I say quietly and look away from him. “Or else I may leave before you can give me blood and I don’t know if I will have the strength to come back here for a while.”

I don’t like threatening him with that, but it’s also true. It took Henry and I forever to get to the forest with how weak and in pain I am.

“Before the curse it helped heighten people’s senses, and sometimes their healing was more enhanced. But it varied on people and how high ranking the Fae was,” Kieran explains. “But there weren’t many instances of it happening before the curse was placed since we had other ways of saving people, better ways. But with the curse still here, we don’t know if you will have any side effects or not. You may not feel anything at all, but it will help you with the blood loss that you have faced.”

“But—”

“If you do have some of the enhanced hearing, vision, and other symptoms, it’s not going to last your whole life. It will wear off at some point when your own blood absorbs mine,” he explains. “And if you do, then you don’t tell anyone about it, so you don’t become a target again. Understand?”

I nod. “How is this going to work?”

“The doctor is on his way right now to make sure that it goes smoothly,” he replies.

“What if you give me too much blood and then you become weak?” I ask, looking up at him, worried.

Kieran chuckles. “That’s not going to happen to me. You would have to take a lot of my blood.”

“I’m here.” A different person walks into the clearing.

“It’s not Hayden?” I look over at Kieran.

“He couldn’t come this time. There is a woman who is expecting to give birth soon and that is what he specialized in before the curse was placed on us,” Kieran explains. “This is Alaric. He knows a lot about Fae blood and has worked with humans before.”

“Hello,” I say shyly.

“It’s nice to finally meet you, Adeline.” Alaric bows before kneeling in front of us. “What happened to you? Are you sick? You are very pale.”

“Did you not tell him anything?” I ask Kieran.

“He failed to mention what was wrong with you, but mentioned to bring the blood transfusion gadget that I have,” Alaric replies.

“She has a cut on her thigh and she lost a lot of blood last night. I want to give her some of my blood so she can heal better,” Kieran replies for me.

The doctor looks at me and nods. “That makes sense. You are so pale and just look like you are in pain.”

“Thanks,” I mutter.

Kieran chuckles and holds his arm out. “I’m ready.”

“This will only take a couple of minutes,” Alaric says as he gets everything ready.

“Wouldn’t it take a lot longer?” I ask.

He shakes his head. “Before the curse was placed, I developed this tube and device that makes it a lot faster so you don’t have to sit there forever. It also helps when there is an emergency and the person needs blood really fast.”

“You’ll have to stick me with a needle?” I ask hesitantly.

“Yes but just for a brief second and then it will be gone.” Alaric holds the needle in his hand and I flinch.

“Maybe I will be better off just going home right now. I don’t think I need this.” I push my back into Kieran’s chest.

The pain and sensation of Mother stitching up my thigh runs through my mind, replaying over and over.

“I think I’m going to be sick,” I mumble as I turn my face away from Kieran.

“Shhh, you’re okay,” he whispers. “Everything is going to be okay. He is only going to poke you for a second and then all will be better.”

I shake my head. “I don’t think I can do it. It keeps replaying in my mind. I can feel the pain from it and I don’t want to experience it again. Please don’t make me go through it again.”

“Sweets, look at me.”

“No.” I place my hand over my mouth as I gag.

Kieran cups my face and forces me to look at him. “You are going to be okay. You are going to look me in the eyes and only pay attention to me. It’s going to be over before you even know it happened.”

“Kieran,” I whisper.

“No. You are going to listen to me talk while Alaric does this. You need my blood so you can heal properly. This is not up for discussion,” he says sternly.

“Wait—”

Kieran runs his thumbs across my cheeks as he shakes his head. “Do you know what I want to do with you when the curse is broken and everything has calmed down?”

But he answers before I can even open my mouth.

“I want to walk down the street with you. I want to go buy the lemon candies that you have grown to love and may even get addicted to one day. I want to show you the halls in the palace where I grew up part of the time. I want to hold you. I want to get hugs from you whenever I want and not have to wait until you can sneak into the forest to come and see me,” he says. “But you know what we are also going to continue to do?”

“No.”

“We are going to continue to go to the forest when we want to get away from everyone and everything going on in life. It’s going to be our little refuge when we need it,” Kieran says. “We’ll sneak to the forest at different times just like we do now. It’ll be our time to tell each other anything and just be together.”

“Maybe we could build a little house out here that we can come to,” I whisper. “Maybe we can even bring our future children here as a little getaway.”

Kieran smiles. “I like the sound of that. Just a place for us to get away from all the noise and be together.”

I nod. It sounds like pure heaven right now and I would do anything to have it this instant.

“All done,” Alaric interrupts.

Turning my head, I look down at my arm and realize there is a little bandage on it, and the same on Kieran’s arm.

“Already?” I ask.

“Yes, you two were pretty focused on each other and you didn’t even flinch when the needle went in.” Alaric chuckles. “Don’t worry, I won’t tell anyone your plans on sneaking to the forest or building a little house back here. Though, I don’t doubt people will find out rather quickly when the house is built and you two are nowhere to be found.”

My cheeks flush and I look away from the healer.

“But it’s a good idea and everyone will respect your privacy when you come out here. It’s good for you two to have something like this,” Alaric says as he starts packing up his things. “Your father had something similar with your mother.”

“He did?” Kieran asks.

“Yes, he did. There was a hidden room in the palace that they would sneak off to. Only a couple of people knew where it actually was, but whenever no one could find them, they just assumed they were together there to get away from everything and be normal for a couple of minutes,” Alaric explains. “They even brought you there when you were just a baby and needed some quiet with you. But it was their spot, and when you got older they didn’t take you there. Probably in fear that you would hide in there for the rest of your life and never go out to meet the people.”

“Were you that shy?” I ask, tilting my head to the side.

Kieran shakes his head. “I loved going out and being with the people. I remember some guards having to drag me back to the palace because I wouldn’t leave the town.”

“But he did love to hide away and make people worried. When he didn’t want to be social, it could last for days and people would always be looking for him. Or when he didn’t want to see someone he would hide.” Alaric shakes his head.

“You would hide when you didn’t want to see someone? I didn’t expect that,” I mumble.

Kieran huffs. “What three year old wouldn’t want to hide when they had to meet girls. I knew they weren’t my mate and I didn’t want to be around them. Most of them were older than me anyway, and I didn’t like when my cheeks got pinched and my hair ruffled.”

Giggling, I cover my mouth as I look at Kieran.

“Are you laughing at me?” he asks.

I shake my head. “I would never.”

His eyes narrow on me before he looks over to Alaric. “Don’t tell her any more stories or she’s going to be laughing at me all the time.”

“If you ever want to hear stories about Kieran, there are a lot of people who will sit down and tell you them,” Alaric says as he wiggles his eyebrows. “You just need to let me know and I can introduce you to them. Or you could just walk and ask and anyone who knew Kieran when he was little or even now will tell you stories.”

My eyes light up. “I would love that.”

“Sweets, no,” Kieran pulls my face toward his. “You are not going to ask them to tell you stories. If you want to hear some then you can come to me and I will tell you some.”

“But if I ask you then you won’t tell me the embarrassing ones,” I point out.

“How do you know?” he asks.

“Because you don’t want me to ask our people to tell me stories. So there must be some stories that are pretty embarrassing if you don’t want me to hear about them which means you won’t tell me.”

Alaric chuckles. “She is smart.”

I smile widely at Alaric. “When the curse is broken you can introduce me to some of the people. I would love to meet them and hear stories.”

Kieran sighs and runs his hands over his face. “What am I going to do with you?”

I shrug. “Keep me. Love me. Allow me to hear the stories about you.”

Kieran kisses my forehead. “Like I would be able to stop you from hearing them.”

CHAPTER 24

“Adeline,” Prince Archie calls as Henry and I walk back from the forest.

My whole body locks up, fists clenching as I turn to look at him.

“Prince Archie,” I say and slightly bow. “What can I do for you?”

He looks up and down my body. “I wanted to see how you are healing… physically and mentally.”

“She was reinjured,” Henry says before I can utter a word.

“Henry,” I hiss. “Stop.”

“You were hurt?” Prince Archie asks. “Where? How? Who did it to you?”

How am I supposed to tell him that Avira, the witch, came in my dreams and cut my leg? He doesn’t even know who the witch is. Prince Archie won’t believe me if I tell him what happened.

“Thanks a lot,” I mumble to Henry before turning to the prince.

“Where are you hurt, Adeline? Answer me before I lose my patience,” Prince Archie’s voice is hard. “Who did it to you?”

“A cut on my thigh reopened and I lost a lot of blood,” I tell him. “I don’t know how it reopened but it managed to.”

He eyes me for several seconds. “Tell the truth.”

My face pales, eyes darting around us as the nerves work through me.

“Prince Archie,” I say. “I really don’t know how it happened. I was asleep on my bed and I woke up with it reopened. Maybe when I was having a bad dream I clawed at it or I moved and it reopened.”

Please believe my lie, I chant in my head.

Sweets? Kieran says. Is everything okay?

I think, I mumble back, trying to keep my attention on Prince Archie.

“Really?” Prince Archie asks, tilting his head to the side.

I nod. “Yes, really. My mother woke up to me screaming in pain and helped me stitch it back up. I’m not lying to you. You can ask several other people. They probably heard my scream in the middle of the night.”

“Prince Archie.” Henry bows. “She is telling the truth. There is talk around town as to why she was screaming in the middle of the night and the guards from the night shift have said she never left the house and no one entered.”

“Very well,” Prince Archie says, rolling his eyes. “So you are still healing?”

“Yes, I am,” I reply. “I’m not able to put much weight on my leg right now.”

“Then why are you out in town and not resting at home?” Prince Archie asks.

“I needed some fresh air. I hadn’t been out in a while and desperately needed to get out, but we are going back to the house now.” I keep my tone even.

Adeline, what is Prince Archie asking you? Kieran asks.

He wanted to see how I was healing and just found out about the cut on my thigh thanks to Henry, I reply.

I wish I had spoken up before Henry did so I could come up with a better excuse and not be put on the spot.

“Are you telling me the truth?” he asks.

I nod. “Yes, Prince Archie. I would not dare lie to you.”

My hand tightens around the fabric of my dress as I force myself not to react to anything.

“I need to get Adeline back to her house. Her mother told her not to be too long,” Henry says before Prince Archie can say anything. “And with the cold and her new injury, she should not be outside for very long. She is still susceptible to getting sick again.”

Prince Archie waves his hand in the air. “You may go. And Adeline?”

“Yes?” I look into his eyes.

“Try not to get hurt again. I would really hate to push the wedding back again after everything that has happened.” He gives me a pointed look.

“I’m sorry,” I whisper. “I will try my hardest not to get hurt again.”

Prince Archie rolls his eyes and leaves. I immediately look over at Henry, blatantly glaring at him.

“What?” he asks.

“Next time don’t talk before me. I didn’t know how to explain it to him. You backed me up into a corner and it could have gone very badly,” I lecture him.

“I’m sorry,” he replies. “It wasn’t my intention to do that to you. I was just trying to help.”

“Just think next time.” I sigh. “I’m too exhausted to go through this all the time.”

I grip onto his arm as I relieve pressure from my injured leg. I’ve been standing up for far too long and need to sit down.

“Let’s get you back home,” he says and starts walking.

I look back at the Fae to see them already looking at me, concern written all over their faces. I force a smile on my face before turning back, focusing all my energy on putting one foot in front of the other.

Tell the Fae not to do anything if they see Prince Archie talking to me, I beg Kieran.

If they can just hold off a little longer.

What happened? he asks. I wasn’t able to get free and come to see what he was saying to you.

He just told me not to get hurt again and he would hate to postpone the wedding again.

“Here you are,” Henry says, pulling me from my conversation.

“Thank you,” I mumble.

He opens the door for me and I walk in.

“Adeline!” Mother calls out as I limp to the table. “Why were you out for so long? Didn’t I tell you not to be long?”

“I couldn’t help it.” I wince in pain as I sit down. “Prince Archie saw me and stopped to talk to us.”

“Did he find out?” she asks, her face full of panic.

“He found out that I reopened my cut but he doesn't know how,” I reply.

“What did he say?” Mother sits down in front of me. “Did you get into trouble? What happened?”

“He told me not to get hurt again,” I reiterate for the second time.

If only I could have everyone in the same room so I could update them all at once instead of telling them one by one. I didn’t realize how exhausting it was to explain it to everyone over and over again.

“He also said that he would hate to postpone the wedding again,” I finally tell her.

“You are still going to marry him?” Mother asks.

“Hopefully by the time the wedding comes around they have found out how to break the curse. It could be any day now,” I say. “They are working on it actively. I trust that they will figure out how before the wedding happens. He won’t allow it to happen.”

“I’m surprised he agreed to it.”

I wince and rub the back of my neck. “He didn’t really have a say in it,” I mumble.

“Right, you made the deal in the heat of the moment and he couldn’t say anything.”

I nod.

“Let me get you some food and then you can go lay down on the bed.” Mother stands up.

“Mother,” I call out.

“It’s not in your room. You will be sleeping in my room. Everything is going to be okay. You don’t have to worry.”

I don’t think she really grasps how bad this whole situation is. If the witch can come in my dreams, then how would it stop her from coming to me right now?

Avira must have slipped you something and gotten into your dreams that way. She shouldn’t be able to do that, Kieran says.

How did you know I was thinking about that? I ask.

You were broadcasting it to me. He chuckles.

Again? I groan.

It’s cute and I’m glad that you do it.

Then why don’t you do it with me? I inquire. It seems like I’m the only one who does it and it doesn’t seem fair.

Because before the curse was placed, I could communicate with my parents and a couple other people so I had practice not to blast my thoughts to everyone. You on the other hand can only talk to me and you haven’t had practice, he explains.

How long did it take for you not to do it?

Several years. Thankfully I was really young so my thoughts weren’t much of anything, but I didn’t get away with anything back then. I don’t want you to stop doing it. I find it cute and it makes me feel like I am right there with you as if you were talking to me about anything and everything.

But what if I want to keep a secret from you?

We shouldn’t be keeping secrets from each other.

What if in the future it’s for your birthday or our anniversary or something? I ask. I need to practice so I can keep those things a secret.

Hmm, I don’t know if I like that. If you learn then I won’t hear it any more.

Chuckling, I relax into the chair even more.

“Talking to him?” Mother asks. “You just saw him.”

“I never want to stop talking to him,” I say before I think about it.

Mother shakes her head. “You sound just like your father and I when we first met. Always wanting to be near each other and never wanting to stop talking. But we never had what you two have.”

“I don’t know how I would have survived if he and I couldn’t talk to each other through the bond,” I say honestly. “I think I would go a little crazy if I had to wait days in between just to see or talk to each other.”

Mother chuckles. “Eat this and then go lie down and rest. You need it.”

CHAPTER 25

“Adeline, we need to talk about what you said two weeks ago,” Kieran says.

“What did I say?” I ask, completely drawing a blank.

He gives me a pointed look. “You know what I’m talking about.”

“Kieran, I really don’t. So much has happened in the two weeks and I can’t keep track of everything.”

He can’t be talking about my pure blood Fae comment, can he?

No. It was a passing question I had, and we quickly moved on from it. But he did say we weren’t done with that conversation.

It’s been on my mind a lot since I asked that question. Kieran is the High Lord and I am a mere human. How are we going to have kids and the people be okay with the future of the race being ruled by halflings?

But it will all have to work out somehow or else Kieran wouldn’t be with me. Unless he decides to have kids with me and then have kids with another Fae so he has offspring for the throne.

No.

Don’t think like that. Kieran won’t cheat on me. He said he is mine and only mine.

“You know exactly what I am talking about. I can see it in your eyes. I have felt your worries in the middle of the night. I know you have been thinking about it a lot,” he says. “I wanted to give you time to come back to me and ask me the question again, but I know you won’t now and we need to talk about this before it becomes something too big and puts a wedge between us. We talk things out in this relationship.”

I take a deep breath and slowly let it out.

“Okay,” I finally say. “Let’s talk about it.”

“What was your question and why did you think of it?” Kieran asks.

I groan and look up at the sky. He is really going to make me ask the question again when both of us already know what it’s about? Why can’t he just explain how it’s going to work out?

“You were talking about giving me blood and then I thought about our future kids—” My eyes go wide and I quickly look away from him.

“Hmm, I like the sound of that,” Kieran purrs. “But we can talk about that later. Continue.”

I continue to look away from Kieran. We’ve talked about it before, but I said that way too easily.

“Sweets, it’s natural. We have talked about it before and we both agreed that we want kids,” Kieran says. “Don’t feel embarrassed because you said our future kids. Never feel embarrassed about it.”

“Sorry,” I mumble.

“You don’t have anything to be sorry for.”

I look back at Kieran and he gently runs his finger across my cheek, leaving a trail of tingles while also calming me down at the same time.

“Everything is going to be okay. I liked that it came out naturally and you are already thinking about them. In the future, I do want to have kids. Maybe we can even have ten.” He wiggles his eyebrows as my eyes widen. “But we’ll talk about how many when we are ready to have kids. I’m good with however many you want.”

My mind is swirling with him wanting ten kids. I’ve always wanted a big family but having ten kids and being in pain that many times is a lot.

“Don’t think about it too much. I want a big family, but if you don’t want to have that many kids, then we don’t have to,” he says gently. “Let’s get back to the question you had.”

I take a deep breath and nod. “I was thinking about them and how you are Fae and I’m human. Will they be halfblood Fae? Will people be bothered by them ruling over them in the future? Are they going to get bullied and dethroned? Will we have another instance like we are living in right now? Are you going to have to have kids with another Fae to have a pureblood so nothing bad happens?” I ramble on, letting all my worries flow out.

“Anything else?” Kieran asks.

“I don’t want them to suffer their whole lives,” I whisper. “We’ve done enough of that and I think they should go through some hardships, but I also don’t want them to struggle and go through so much in their lives that they aren’t enjoying it. I don’t want you to sleep with another woman when I am your mate.”

“And what do you think we should do about that?” he asks.

Did he not hear any of my questions? Why is he making me come up with solutions for them when he has the answers to it all?

“Can you answer my question? If they are going to be halfblood Fae and if they are going to suffer? I need to know before I can make any sort of plans or else my mind is going to go into overdrive and come up with so many things and waste time. Or if you need to take someone else to have kids with.” I take a deep breath, my chest heaving as I wait for him to answer.

Please tell me that you aren’t going to take another woman to have kids with. That I’m the only person you want to be with for the rest of your life.

“First off, I will never have another woman in my life. You are the only one I want and the only one I am going to have. They are not going to be halfblood Fae. They will be pure Fae. Even if they were going to be halfblood Fae, I still wouldn’t take another Fae female to have pureblood Fae kids with,” Kieran replies. “I don’t want you to ever think about that again or worry. You are it for me.”

“How is that possible when I’m human?” I tilt my head to the side as I look at him, feeling relieved that he isn’t going to take another female partner to have kids with.

I hadn’t thought of that possibility until just right now.

“Because I am the High Lord, so my genes are strong. You are also slowly going to change when the curse is broken and you’ll become like a Fae,” Kieran explains. “It’s hard to go into detail on how and what is going to change since it hasn’t happened in hundreds of years. But by the time we have kids, your body will have changed enough to where you will be just like a Fae.”

“So they aren’t going to get bullied or dethroned?”

He nods. “They will not. They are going to be full Fae so you don’t have to worry about anything.”

I sigh and lean my head on his chest.

“Were you this worried about it?” he asks as he runs his hands through my hair.

I nod. “I really was. I know our people love me already but I was worried about our future kids and what was going to happen. I didn’t want anything bad to happen to them.”

“We aren’t going to allow anything to happen to them, and I know when we do have kids, our people are going to adore them and want to help us take care of them,” Kieran says. “You don’t have to worry about that.”

“Will I see our kids when we have them, or is everyone going to keep them away from us?” I chuckle.

“You will see them, don’t worry. We’ll have a couple trusted people who can look after them when we want to have some alone time or need to go visit a town and can’t bring them along,” he explains.

I pull away from his chest and look up at him. “I don’t know if I can be apart from them for that long.”

Kieran cups my face. “Everything is going to work out. There will be times when we won’t be able to take them with us and it’s going to be hard, but we’ll get through it.”

“Will I be able to talk to them like I talk to you?” I ask.

“When they hit a certain age they will be able to talk to us, both but they won’t get that ability until they are at least five.”

My eyebrows bunch together. “At least five?”

“It varies per kid but the youngest they can communicate with their parents is five.” Kieran pulls me back into his embrace.

I hold onto his shirt, feeling overwhelmed.

“What’s wrong?” Kieran asks.

“I’ve been around babies before, little kids, but right now I feel like I don’t know anything. I’m worried that when we do have kids, I won’t be able to take care of them because I don’t know when they will be able to do certain things,” I ramble.

“Everything is going to be okay,” he reiterates for the umpteenth time. “When the curse is broken I’ll make sure to tell you things about Fae kids slowly so by the time you get pregnant, you will know what is going to happen.”

“Is there some woman that I can talk to when I do get pregnant who has had a kid before?” I ask. “I know you are here for me and can answer my questions, but you’ve never had a kid.”

Kieran chuckles. “When the curse is broken I will introduce you to several females who have had kids so you can talk to them and ask all the questions you want. Does that sound okay?”

“Yes.” I nod my head. “Thank you.”

We hold each other for several minutes.

“How is your thigh doing?” Kieran asks.

“I’ve been off of it all last week and it has healed nicely. Mother helps me clean it and put the salve on it,” I reply. “I think it’s almost fully healed. Thanks to the salve but also you giving me blood.”

“Anytime. Have you been sleeping well?”

Sighing, I snuggle my face into his chest, not wanting to talk about it.

“Have you guys gotten any closer with the book and spells?” I ask after several minutes.

Kieran pulls back. “We are not done talking about your sleeping habits.” He boops my nose. “But we have made progress. We found out which spell it is and are actively trying to translate it and make sure that we are getting it correct.”

Hope blossoms inside of me. “Really?”

“Yes, there are only a couple of us who have remembered the witch’s language and we are each taking a turn translating it to see if we get the same thing,” he explains. “We want to make sure that everything is correct before we try anything.”

Tears pool in my eyes and I quickly blink them back. “That is such a relief. Soon you will be free and soon we will be able to be together.”

Kieran cups my face. “Very soon. Just hang in there a little longer.”

CHAPTER 26

“Sit down and relax,” Mother urges me. “Ever since your leg has healed, you’ve been running around like crazy doing chores.”

It’s been a week since Kieran told me the good news of them finding the spell and I haven’t been able to keep still. Any day now he could tell me they figured it out and the spell will be broken.

Everything is going to change.

“What has made you so happy?” Mother asks as I sit down.

“Just some good news I got told last week,” I say, thinking back to that day. “Things are going to change and I can’t wait.”

Mother gives me a questioning look. “What do you mean?”

I shake my head. “I’ll tell you when things are certain.”

I’m just waiting for Kieran to talk to me. I didn’t think it would be this hard to not ask him every other minute if they have gotten closer, but I’ve stopped myself so many times.

Knock. Knock. Knock.

“I’ll go get it.” I get up before Mother can say anything.

I open the door to see Henry standing there, his hand in the air like he’s about to knock once more.

“Prince Archie wants to see you in the castle,” Henry tells me.

My eyebrows bunch together as I look at him. “He does? Are you sure? He hasn’t wanted to see me for a while since I got hurt.”

Henry nods. “Before I left the palace today, he said that he wanted to see you after lunch.”

“Why didn’t you tell me before?” I ask rudely.

He shrugs. “By the time I got here, you were busy with chores outside and I didn’t want to interrupt you.”

I shake my head in disbelief. “If he ever does this again, you need to tell me right away. I need to mentally prepare for this. You know how he can be.”

“I’m sorry. If there is a next time I will make sure that I tell you right away.”

“No need to be sorry. I’m just on edge with everything,” I mumble. Does he know that we are so close to breaking the curse? “Let me get my jacket.”

“You do not need it. It’s warm outside.”

But it makes me feel better when I wear it. Like it covers my body so Prince Archie can’t see anything.

“We need to get going or else we are going to be late,” Henry says, rushing me. “You are going to gain attention if you wear the jacket.”

“Okay,” I reply, and we start walking.

Maybe it would be better if I gained a little attention in the town rather than being uncomfortable with Prince Archie. But it’s too late now to go and get it and I won’t be able to borrow one either.

Can you meet with me right now? Kieran asks. We found out how to break the curse.

My eyes go wide and I grip onto Henry’s arm. “Shit. Do we have to go to the palace right now?” I ask.

Henry nods. “Yes, we do. Prince Archie is waiting for you and you do not want to get on his bad side.”

I can’t meet with you right now. Prince Archie is expecting me, I reply. But once we are done I will come to you right away.

Stay safe, Kieran replies.

Why did they have to find out how to break the curse right when I’m needed somewhere else? Why couldn’t it have been a couple hours earlier or even a couple of hours after I met with Prince Archie?

Can you tell me through here? I ask Kieran as Henry and I start walking again.

I would rather not. There is a lot that I need to explain and I don’t want you going into the meeting with Prince Archie with a distracted or worried mindset, he replies. We will wait for you here, don’t worry. Nothing is going to happen until after I talk to you.

It eases my worries slightly, but I can’t help but wonder how they are going to break the curse. What does it entail?

I promise I won’t be long, I say. I’ll come back as soon as I can.

Don’t do anything irrational and make him suspicious.

I won’t, I promise. But he shouldn’t want that much from me right now. It’s nine months until the wedding and most of it has already been planned.

Now I don’t have to worry about the wedding either. Unless breaking the curse is going to take nine months.

Will it take a long time? I ask.

For what?

To break the curse. Will it take a long time or is it a simple thing and we will be done?

Please let it be something easy and quick.

It is something simple but at the same time it’s not simple or easy, he replies, his voice full of so many different emotions.

What do you mean?

“Adeline, is everything okay?” Henry asks. “We are almost there.”

“Everything is okay,” I mumble.

We will talk about it when you are done with Prince Archie. Think happy thoughts while you are there and don’t be distracted, Kieran finally says.

Unease fills me as we walk into the palace. What could be simple but at the same time not simple or easy? Why won’t Kieran just tell me how to break the curse?

“We are here,” Henry finally says after walking down so many different hallways.

“You said Prince Archie wants to meet me?” I ask.

He nods. “Yes, he said to bring you to the wing that you two will be sharing once you guys get married.”

Why would he want to meet here?

“Where is he?” I ask.

“Prince Archie couldn’t make it so I get to talk to you instead,” Avira says, appearing right in front of us.

I take several steps back and shake my head. “We aren’t supposed to be talking.”

“Who do you think told Henry that you needed to be here?” she asks, crossing her arms.

“No,” I whisper.

“Me.”

“Hen—” I stop talking as I look around the hallway, not finding Henry anywhere. “What did you do to him?” I demand.

Was he part of this the whole time? Did he know it was Avira and pretended like it was the prince?

No.

He has shown over and over again that he was loyal to the Fae. What changed?

Kieran? I call through the bond.

Adeline, what’s wrong? he replies.

“It was so easy to deceive him.” Avira chuckles. “Thankfully I remembered one of my spells to make me change forms.”

Sweets! Kieran screams through the bond but my attention is on Avira.

“For a second I thought Prince Archie was going to catch me as I am out of practice pretending to be a male. But alas, he did not,” Avira says.

I take several steps back, my eyes darting across the hallway for an escape route.

“There’s no way for you to escape.” Avira takes a step closer to me. “No one will be able to hear you scream or come and get you.”

Terror runs through me and before I can think of anything, my legs start moving on their own accord, running to the left. Avira’s chuckles echo through the hallway, making me pump my legs faster.

Sweets, what’s wrong? Kieran asks. Where are you?

I’m in the palace. It was a setup. Avira is after me! I yell as I continue to run.

Find a place to hide and I’m coming to you!

No! You can’t. You can’t come after me and get caught. I’m going to get out of this without you getting caught! I reply.

Adeline.

Kieran, please. I don’t need both of us getting caught and then everything going up in flames and the curse not being broken.

“Do you really think you can get away from me?” Avira asks.

I can try my best, I mutter in my head as I turn down a different hallway. The sound of fingers snapping catches my attention, making me trip over my own feet and fall to the ground.

“Got you,” Avira whispers as she appears in front of me.

CHAPTER 27

“Avira, please,” I beg her as I scooch back.

She grips my face with her hand, digging the tips of her fingers into my skin. “I had so much fun toying with you this whole time. Keeping you on edge, not knowing when or if I was going to come to you.”

Tears pool in my eyes and I can hear Kieran trying to talk to me.

“The look of terror and anxiety any time you thought you saw me in town. It was quite easy to slip something into your food so I could come into your dreams and terrorize you even more,” she says.

I try to move out of her grip but my whole body is stuck in place… just like in the dream.

“You thought your dreams were safe from me but I wanted to show you that no matter what you try to do, you are never safe from me.” She makes a tsking sound.

“Please, you don’t have to do this,” I whisper.

“Oh, but I do. You are too much of a threat to stay alive.” She tilts her head as she looks at me. “Such a pity. I wanted to have more time to mess with you, but you are not useful to me any longer.”

“I thought you wanted to know where the book was,” I quickly say, trying to buy myself time.

“I do, but you are clearly not going to tell me so I might as well kill you,” she replies and lets go of my face.

Avira snaps her fingers and our surroundings change to the throne room. Why are we here?

“You lost your bargaining chip for your life.” Avira waves her hands in the air as she talks. “Now it’s time for you to die a slow and painful death.”

“Avira, we can talk about this. I don’t need to die,” I try to reason with her.

Avira takes several steps toward me, smiling. “Oh, but you do. What did you do with the book? At first I thought you stole the book to break the curse. You Fae sympathizer. It’s people like you who threaten the royal family.”

Her head tilts back as she laughs. It’s forever before she stops laughing and looks at my frail body on the ground in front of her.

“Do you want to know how to break the curse?” she asks.

I stay silent.

“Answer me!” she yells, her fists clenching at the side of her body.

“Ye-yes,” I stutter.

Adeline! Where are you? Kieran screams through the bond.

In the palace… the throne room, I reply.

I’m coming. Get somewhere safe and whatever you do, do not get near Avira! Kieran tells me. Get somewhere safe and wait for me to come to you.

I’ll try, I whisper.

Too late but I don’t tell him that. I know deep down that I’m not going to make it out alive. I have no idea how to get out of this invisible hold.

Avira won’t allow me.

“The mate of the High Lord is the key,” she tells me, chuckling at the end. “Sadly, he hasn’t found her yet. But he found you instead and you fell for him. You do realize that you will never be able to have him, right? He has a mate out there, a Fae mate.”

I bite my inner cheeks, desperately trying to keep my face from giving anything away. Why does she think his mate has to be Fae? Can she not detect that him and I are mates?

“Do you know what she has to do?” Avira asks and I shake my head. “Poor mate of the High Lord. Hopefully, she is never found. The tragic fate she will have to go through.”

I keep my mouth shut, afraid that I’m going to give away that I’m his mate. Would she even believe me if I told her?

“Don’t you want to know what the High Lady has to do to break the curse?” Avira asks.

“Wh-what does she have to do?” I’m so afraid to ask.

I’m afraid to hear the answer.

“I’ll tell you since you’re going to die and won’t be able to tell anyone else the key information.”

But Kieran and his friends already know how to break the curse, and it’s all connected to me. How are they going to break the curse if I’m dead? But it’s not like I can do anything to get out of this situation.

“She has to die,” Avira reveals.

Everything around me goes quiet as her words replay in my head over and over again.

She has to die.

I have to die.

There will never be me and Kieran walking down the street, hand in hand, laughing, smiling, eating good food and making so many memories.

We will never have kids.

We won’t grow old together.

We won’t have a wedding.

Kieran will live alone for the rest of his life.

No.

Adeline! What’s wrong? Kieran asks.

He knew all along and wanted to tell me in person that I was going to have to die. And I know deep down that he was never going to allow that to happen. He was going to live the rest of his life with the curse over them because he doesn’t want me to die.

But I can’t allow that to happen.

They need to be broken from this curse and live a better life, even if it means I’ll never get to see it.

Adeline, talk to me! What’s going on? he asks.

But I can’t bring myself to actually talk to him for the last time. There are so many things I want to say to him and yet I don’t know where to start. I don’t have enough time to actually tell him everything.

“Too bad you won’t ever get to see what the High Lady will look like,” Avira whispers as she thrusts the sword into my stomach, twisting and turning it.

Screaming, it feels like fiery, burning pain slices through my stomach.

Sweets! Kieran yells through the bond. What happened?

I love you, I whisper through the bond. Find someone else to love. Don’t stay alone forever. Be happy.

Sweets, don’t you dare! Just stay alive for a little bit longer. I’m almost to you, Kieran begs me.

Avira lets go of the sword and my body hits the ground, blood gushing out of my stomach.

“Such a pretty sight,” she whispers and cocks her head to the side.

“Avira,” I weakly say. “Want to know something?” I manage to get out.

I suck in a breath, trying to stay alive for a couple more seconds. Please let me get these words out. But the black around my vision continues to cover my vision.

“What?” she asks, rolling her eyes and getting closer to me.

“I’m the High Lady,” I confidently say for the first and last time.

Her eyes go wide right as the door bursts open. She whirls around and a huge roar fills the room.

“Adeline!” Kieran screams.

Avira turns back to me and I smile at her panicked looking face.

“No,” she whispers.

Black starts to encroach into my vision. Kieran runs straight toward us full force. Avira takes one more look between Kieran and I before disappearing into thin air.

“Sweets, just stay alive for me.” He drops to his knees and carefully pulls me into his arms.

Out of the corner of my eyes I see Elias, Zayden, and Everett flank around us, watching for any danger.

“K-Kieran.” I cough, blood spilling out of my mouth.

“Shhh, don’t talk. Everything is going to be okay. The healer is on their way and you are going to pull through this,” he says. “I just need you to stay quiet and conserve your energy.”

“I love you,” I manage to get out.

Tears pool in my eyes as we stare at each other. This is the last time I’m going to see his face. The last time he is going to hold me.

“Adeline.” He shakes his head.

“Find someone else.” I cough several times. “Be happy.”

Kieran puts pressure on my stomach wound, making me howl in pain but it comes out weak.

I’m not going to survive another five minutes with how much blood I’ve already lost.

“Adeline, you are going to survive this. I just need you to hold on for a little longer. They are almost here,” Kieran begs me.

“Please.” It’s my turn to beg him. “Please find someone else to love in your life.”

“Shhh, don’t talk like that. You are the only one that I want in this life and the next. You are it for me,” he whispers.

I close my eyes and take a deep breath, coughing up blood.

“Open your eyes for me. Look at me. You’re going to be okay,” Kieran says. “Come on, Sweets. Open your eyes for me.”

I crack my eyes, barely, and look up at him. “So tired,” I mumble, feeling extremely weak.

“I know you’re tired but you need to keep your eyes open for me. I need you to stay awake until the healer gets here.”

“The curse.” I cough once more.

“Shhhh,” he tries to silence me.

“Can’t be broken until I die,” I manage to get out.

“I don’t care if the curse is broken or not. You are not dying on me. I’m not going to lose you.” His voice cracks at the end.

“It’s going to be okay,” I whisper and close my eyes again.

“Sweets, open your eyes,” he commands. “Open those beautiful eyes for me.”

My head lulls back and everything goes quiet. All of a sudden I find myself standing across the room, but when I look over at Kieran my body is still lying in his arms and he’s… he’s crying?

“Adeline, please wake up. I can’t lose you. Open your eyes and tell me that you are going to survive this. Please, Sweets,” he begs me as he holds my body closer to his.

I open my mouth but no sound comes out. Why can’t I talk to him? What is going on?

Looking down at my hands, I see right through them.

“Everything is going to be okay,” a voice whispers in my ear.

Whirling around, I scan the room but no one is standing anywhere near me.

“Stand by his side. Find the witch and kill her. You are the only one who can,” the same voice says, sounding farther away.

How? I try to get out, but no sound comes out of my mouth.

“Remember the dagger Kieran gave you,” she says. “It’s the key.”

I look back over at my body to see a shadowy figure standing at the top of my head.

She looks over at me. “Remember, the dagger is the key.” She touches my forehead and everything around me goes blurry.

Gasping, my eyes shoot open as I stare into Kieran’s cobalt blue eyes before everything goes black again.

CHAPTER 28

“Please wake up,” someone whispers. “I need you to wake up for me.”

Who is talking? Why do they sound like they are underwater and so far away from me?

“High Lord, you are needed,” someone else says.

High Lord?

Wait.

Kieran?

I try to open my mouth but nothing is working. Why can’t I open my eyes, move my fingers, or talk?

“I don’t want to leave her side,” Kieran replies.

“High Lord, you are needed out there to talk to the people. Everyone is wondering what happened and you need to talk to them to calm them down or we are going to have a riot on our hands,” the person explains.

“Elias, I don’t want to leave her side. What if she wakes up and doesn’t remember what happened? What if she is so terrified and I’m not there to help her calm down? I won’t leave her side,” he declares.

“Her mother will stay by her side the whole time. You don’t need to worry about her.”

Kieran grips my hand tighter. “I am worried about her though. She died.”

I died?

How am I here then? Wait. The shadowy figure. Who was she? How did she bring me back to life?

“High Lord, she is going to be here when you get back,” Elias tries to reason with him. “You haven’t left her side in three days. The healer says she has healed fully and it’s just a matter of time before she wakes up. You know how exhausted she was before this.”

“Exactly, and before everything went down she was only able to sleep with me by her side or talking to her. I am not going to leave her side,” Kieran says.

Elias sighs. “Kieran, I’m saying this as your friend and not as your right-hand man.”

“Then maybe you shouldn’t say it right now,” Kieran mutters.

I try to put all my strength into squeezing his hand back, but Kieran doesn’t give any reaction at all. Why can’t I tell him that I’m here for him?

“I know you are worried about her and want to be right beside her the whole time, but you have an obligation to the people right now. Things have changed. You have put the former king and prince in prison and people are questioning why. There are mad people out there that can easily change the tide on how everyone perceives you,” Elias says. “I know you want to be right next to her and make sure that everything is going to be okay, but if things turn for the worst out there, she won’t be safe. You need to get ahead of this.”

“I know,” he replies.

The former king and prince? What are they talking about? Is the curse broken?

So many questions are swirling through my mind right now, causing me to be in pain.

“Everything is going to be okay,” Kieran whispers and kisses my hand. “I’m going to be gone for a little while, but I’m not leaving you behind. I’ll be back as soon as I can.”

I want to tell him not to leave. What if Avira comes back and does something to me? What if she is already doing something to me?

Wait.

Is this all a dream that is playing because of her? Where am I actually?

“Come this way,” Elias says. “They are all waiting outside for you to talk to them and explain.”

“I don’t want to leave her. I can feel her anxiety like she knows I’m about to leave.” Kieran doesn’t let go of my hand.

“But you are going to have to. You can still feel her emotions which means she is alive. If anything happens to her, you will be able to feel it and can go back to her, but you are needed out there now,” Elias tries to reason with him. “Come on.”

Kieran lets go of my hand and plants a soft kiss on my forehead. “Your mother is coming in just a couple of minutes to keep you company.”

I hear his footsteps leave and silence fills the room.

“Oh, Adeline,” Mother whispers. “I neve⁠—”

But her voice wades away as I’m being pulled under again.

“I told you I should have never left her!” Kieran yells.

What’s going on?

“If I didn’t leave, then none of this would have happened!” he continues to yell while holding my hand.

“We didn’t know it would happen,” a different voice says. “She was stable the whole time you were here with her.”

“Because I was here!” His voice holds so much anger. “She needs me beside her so she can heal. I can’t deal with the people right now.”

“But you have to. I know you don’t want to, but this is a tricky moment right now. It could go one of two ways and we need it to go in our favor,” Elias says.

Kieran sighs. All I want to do right now is wake up and be able to comfort him. I want to tell him that everything is going to be okay but I don’t even know if that is possible. I don’t know what’s wrong with me.

I focus all of my energy on squeezing his hand as he holds mine. He needs to know that I’m okay.

“I know it is but I never thought that Adeline would have to die to break the curse. I didn’t know there was going to be so much going on that I would have to pick and choose what to do,” Kieran finally speaks.

I bear down and focus on squeezing my hand.

“Sweets?” Kieran finally says my name. “Did you just squeeze my hand?”

Did I?

“Squeeze my hand again if you can hear me right now,” he practically begs me. “Come on, Sweets. I’m right here. You’re safe and you are okay.”

“Open your eyes,” another person says.

I feel gentle warm hands touch my face, opening my eyes and flashing a bright light in them. Groaning, I try to close my eyes, but nothing is working in my favor.

“She just made a noise. Did you hear that, Doctor?” Kieran asks. “She is waking up, right? Please tell me she is waking up.”

“High Lord, I’m going to need you to stand on the other side of the room while I look over the High Lady,” someone says.

“Alaric, I will not step away from my mate,” Kieran declares.

I grip onto Kieran’s hand, not wanting him to go away either.

“She’s gripping my hand and I’m not going to let her go,” Kieran says. “Work around me.”

Alaric sighs and opens my eyes again, looking directly at me. “Adeline, can you hear me? Move your eye slightly if you can.”

Can I even move my eye? Why am I so incredibly weak?

“You’re okay, High Lady. Calm down and just focus on me right now,” Alaric continues to say.

I can see him, but moving anything is nearly impossible. If he wasn’t holding my eye open, then I wouldn’t be able to see him.

“It might take you a little longer to regain your strength to do anything. There is nothing to be worried about,” he says. “We are going to feed you and help you move your body so that you can slowly regain your strength. Kieran is going to stay by your side through it all to make sure that you have the support.”

“Alaric, you can’t promise that,” Elias interrupts him. “Things are going on outside that he may need to attend to.”

“We are going to make sure that it happens. She clearly needs him and he needs to be with her,” Alaric responds.

Kieran? I try to say through the bond.

But he doesn’t say anything.

What is going on? Why can’t I communicate with him or move? What did Avira do to me?

“Alaric, we need to make sure that humans and Fae are getting along and he needs to speak with them to explain things.” Elias raises his voice and my fingers flinch at the loud outburst.

“Calm your voice down,” Kieran growls. “You are scaring her.”

“I’m sorry,” Elias mumbles. “That wasn’t my intention, but you have to hear me out. I know you want to be with her, but you have to think about the kingdom as well. Things are needed and you can’t stay with her all the time.”

“I can and I will,” Kieran replies. “I will do my work from here and if I need to talk to anyone then they can either come in here or I will write down what you need to say and you can say it to them. But I will not be leaving her.”

I grip Kieran’s hand, wanting to talk to him but my mouth won’t move.

“Sweets?” His voice is gentle. “What’s wrong?”

I want everyone to stop arguing with each other. I want to tell Kieran that I’m going to be okay and he doesn’t have to worry about anything.

But I know even if I was able to tell him that… that he would still worry about me. It’s something both of us do for each other and it’s never going to end.

“Can you try talking to her through the bond to see if she can talk back?” Alaric suggests.

I’ve tried before and I wasn’t able to reach him.

“I can’t. It’s like there is a wall around her with no way in,” Kieran says.

Wh-what?

“Try soothing her. She must be scared not being able to move or talk to anyone. Calm her down and maybe the walls will also come down,” Alaric replies. “I’ll be waiting outside. Elias, come with me.”

I hear their footsteps leave and worry flows through me that Kieran is going to leave soon after.

“I’m not going anywhere,” he says. “I’m right here and I’m staying here. We’re never going to leave each other’s side now.”

I can get behind that. I told Kieran I never wanted to leave his side once the curse was broken. He would be stuck with me forever.

“I shouldn’t have left you earlier. I thought you would be okay for a couple of minutes but I was mistaken. I’m sorry for leaving you,” he whispers as he rubs his thumb across the back of my hand.

I want to tell him it’s okay and that he couldn’t have known I needed him right next to me.

“I’m sorry I didn’t get to you in time before Avira stabbed you.” His voice is raw. “I’m sorry I wasn’t able to save you.”

“K—” My voice is scratchy.

“Sweets?” he calls out. “Don’t try to talk. Let me get you some water first.”

Kieran lets go of my hand and before I know it, he’s helping me sit up and holding the cup up to my lips.

“Slowly drink,” he encourages me.

How am I supposed to drink when I can’t even open my eyes?

But somehow, when the water flows into my mouth, I find myself swallowing the little water.

“Such a good girl,” he purrs. “You are doing so well. Continue to drink a little more.”

When I’m done drinking, I push my lips together and Kieran holds me close to him.

“I was so worried that you were never going to wake up again,” he mumbles before he kisses my forehead. “I was worried the last time you opened your eyes was when you died.”

But I remember waking up after the lady touched my forehead and looking into his eyes.

“Ki-Kier⁠—”

“Shhh, it’s okay. You are just regaining your strength. Everything is going to be okay from now on. I’ve got you and I’m never going to let you go,” he promises me.

“Wh-what happened?” I finally manage to get out before he tells me to be quiet.

I need to know what happened after everything went dark.

“We can talk about it another time. Right now I just want to be with you and help you relax.” He tries to change the subject.

“Please,” I beg. “I want to know.”

I start coughing as my throat protests from the talking.

“Adeline, we can talk about it later when you are more recovered. I don’t want you to get worked up,” he says.

I finally manage to open my eyes and beg him through my eyes to tell me what happened. I need to know what happened after I passed out.

“Kieran.” Tears fill my eyes. “Please.”

He sighs and kisses my forehead. “Okay.”

CHAPTER 29

“Before I get started, do you want to sit up so we can face each other or do you want me to continue to hold you?” he asks. “Blink once for yes and two for no. Or move your eyes once for yes and two for no.”

I chuckle and all I want to do is cup his face and tell him how cute he is right now. Does he realize that what he said makes no sense? How am I supposed to say yes or no to a question that I need to pick one or the other?

“Why are you laughing?” he asks and then his eyes go wide. “Shit. Once for the first option and two for the second option. I don’t want you to talk too much and hurt yourself. Maybe I should get the doctor first so he can look over you.”

“Kieran.” I say his name gently.

“Shhh, lets get the doctor first. I’m not trying to get out of telling you but I want to make sure that you are okay before we do anything. I need to make sure you are okay.” He looks into my eyes. “Alaric!”

“Yes, High Lord?” Alaric replies as he walks into the room. “Oh, she opened her eyes.”

“Can you check over her to make sure she is alright?” Kieran asks.

“Right away. Can you please lay her back down and I’ll look her over,” Alaric says.

Kieran puts me down and Alaric starts looking over everything.

“Are you feeling alright?” he asks and then looks at Kieran. “Can she talk? How have you been communicating?”

“Tired,” I mumble weakly before Kieran can say anything.

Alaric’s head snaps in my direction, eyes huge. “Oh, I didn’t know you were talking. That will make things easier.”

“She goes into a coughing fit whenever she talks a lot,” Kieran says. “I’ve given her some water and told her not to talk much.”

“She has been out for three days and before that she wasn’t well hydrated, and as much as I’ve given her fluids through IV, her throat hasn’t gotten anything,” Alaric says. “She just needs to slowly talk again and continue to drink to soothe her muscles.”

“And there is nothing else wrong with her?” Kieran asks. “Everything is okay?”

“She is weak from getting stabbed, dying, and coming back to life. It’s going to take a while for her to regain her strength, but if she eats and gets enough rest, she should be able to regain strength fairly quickly,” Alaric explains. “But other than that, her wound has healed from your blood but also you healing her.”

My eyes connect with Kieran’s. “You healed me?”

He nods. “Your wound was still bleeding and you had already lost a lot of blood. When I realized the curse had been broken, it was the first thing I did.”

“And I didn’t get to witness it?” I push my bottom lip out.

Kieran has talked about it so many times and I wanted to be able to witness it with my own eyes. I wanted to be part of it.

He chuckles. “Of course you would be disappointed that you weren’t able to see it. Hopefully you never get hurt again so you won’t be able to witness it.”

“Can I get a paper cut?” I ask before going into a coughing fit.

Alaric holds the glass up to my lips and I take several sips of water.

“Try not to talk as much,” he tells me again. “I know you are regaining your strength ever so slowly and Kieran is here, but you don’t want to damage any of your vocal cords.”

Kieran could just heal me if something like that happens. Not that I want to get hurt, but now I don’t have to worry as much about how I’m going to heal because the curse is broken.

“You are not going to purposefully hurt yourself so you can watch me heal you.” Kieran walks over to me and cups my face. “Do you understand? We are not going to intentionally harm ourselves, so you can be part of the process and watch me heal you. I don’t want you to get hurt again.”

“I wasn’t going to,” I mumble and close my eyes. “I never was going to do it. I just—” I stop talking and sigh.

“Everything is going to be okay,” he says. “I just needed to say that in case you were thinking it. I didn’t want you to harm yourself.”

“I promise I won’t.” I open my eyes and look at him.

“Good.” He kisses my forehead.

“I’ll have someone cook some food for you to eat,” Alaric says, interrupting our stares at each other. “If you need anything, just call me.”

My eyes go wide and Kieran looks at me with alarm.

“What’s wrong?” he asks as Alaric walks out of the room. “Tell me what’s wrong so I can make it better.”

“The curse is broken,” I whisper.

He smiles. “It is.”

“Can they hear my thoughts?”

Kieran chuckles and shakes his head. “No, they can’t. You won’t have that ability until you start to turn Fae.”

“I don’t want them to hear my thoughts,” I quickly ramble.

He cups my face again, forcing me to look into his eyes and calm down. “When the time comes, I am going to teach you how to block them out so you won’t accidentally say something to everyone when you aren’t supposed to. And if it happens once or twice, they aren’t going to harm you over it. They know you are new to everything revolving around us and are going to be very gracious.”

“And a lot of the kids haven’t ever been able to use this ability, so you may hear some of their thoughts until they master how not to broadcast them. Don’t worry, right now everyone is going to be super patient with everyone since it’s been hundreds of years since we’ve used our magic,” Kieran explains. “You aren’t going to be the only one going through a hard time.”

“Okay,” I mumble. “Now can you tell me about what happened after I passed out and before?”

Kieran sighs but nods. “When you said you went to the palace to talk to the prince I had a feeling something was off. Then I felt your terror and that’s when I got several of the Fae to come with me and go to you. Several of them knocked out guards so that we could get there fast enough, but I still didn’t get there in time.”

“You knocked out the guards?” I ask.

“Yes, we didn’t want to kill them but we also didn’t want them to cause any trouble. They are all getting treated and have all woken up,” Kieran says. “You know what happened when I got to you. I held you while you were unconscious and healed you. It wasn’t until the prince and king came into the throne room that I let you go and knocked them out.”

“Where are they?”

“They are locked up in a cell. Don’t worry, they are getting food and water once a day but they will remain locked up until I figure out what I am going to do with them.”

I open my mouth but quickly close it, afraid of how Kieran is going to answer that question.

“Tell me,” he insists.

“Wh-what are you going to do with them?” I ask.

“The king I don’t know, but Prince Archie… I’m going to make him suffer for what he has done to the Fae but also for what he has made you go through,” Kieran replies. “He is not going to get away with making you watch me get a whipping twice, watching your best friend die, and also making you witness all the horrible acts he has done to the Fae. Not to mention the way he looked at you and talked to you.”

I huff out air in frustration as my arm won’t move. “Grab my hand and pretend I’m squeezing it.”

Kieran chuckles and does as I say.

“I want to be there if you do anything to him. I want to see the expression on his face when he realizes who you are to me. I want to tell him all the promises I made were actually lies and I was never going to marry him,” I tell Kieran and throw myself into a coughing fit.

“Sweets, you need to stop talking as much,” Kieran gently scolds me. “You are supposed to be resting, not making it worse.”

“Please,” I manage to get out before he holds up a cup to my lips and I drink.

“Don’t worry, I already promised you would be there,” he says.

“Adeline?” Mother walks into the room holding the baby. “I heard you were finally awake and rushed over here!”

“Mom,” I whisper.

Kieran stands up and grabs the baby from my mother’s arms as she makes her way over toward me, wrapping her arms tightly around my body.

“I was so worried you were never going to wake up,” she mumbles into my ear. “Kieran kept reassuring me that you were going to but I just couldn’t wrap my head around it. Not after he told me you died and then magically came back to life.”

Mother pulls away from me and sits on the edge of the bed.

“How?” Mother asks as she searches my face.

“Oh, I can take the baby back.” Mother holds her hands out. “I didn’t mean for you to hold him.”

“It’s okay, I wanted to hold him. I can continue to hold him while we all talk. Give you a little break,” Kieran replies.

“Are you sure?” Mother looks at him hesitantly.

He nods. “I’m sure. We are family.”

Mother looks at me, her mouth hanging open. “I don’t think I’m ever going to get used to him saying that.”

A smile forms on my face as I look between both of them. I never thought they were going to meet each other in person but here they are, getting along so well like they’ve known each other for their whole lives.

“How did you come back to life?” Kieran asks. “It wasn’t me. I didn’t have the magic to do it.”

I try to think back to what it was when I remember the shadowy figure who touched my head.

“I don’t know who it was,” I whisper as I look at Kieran.

“It was a person?” He cocks his head to the side.

“A woman,” I say. “She was shadowy, like she wasn’t fully there but she touched my forehead and that’s when I woke up and looked at you before passing out again. Did I really die?”

Kieran nods. “You were dead for several minutes. I felt you take your last breath, felt your heart beat for the last time in my arms. Your body went limp and there was no bringing you back.”

Tears pool in my eyes as I remember him crying out for me and not being able to do anything. What if I had actually died and that was the end of it?

“And then all of the sudden you gasped, looked at me for a brief second, and passed out,” he continues to say as he rocks the baby.

I can’t wait for the day when he is holding our kids, rocking them to sleep while we talk. Kieran briefly smiles down at the baby before looking at me.

“That’s when I felt the curse break and knew I had to heal you, but at that moment you had already lost so much blood and I knew I had to rush you to one of the healers,” Kieran says. “That’s when the king and prince came into the room and I let you go for a brief moment to apprehend them before I rushed back to you.”

“And the following days after?” I ask.

“I stayed by your side. I never left because I didn’t know how you would react. The first time I had to leave was earlier today when I had to talk to everyone,” Kieran replies.

“What happened to me when you left?” I hesitantly ask.

“Your heart stopped.”

CHAPTER 30

My mouth falls open as I look between Kieran and Mother.

“He’s telling the truth,” Mother says. “You were perfectly fine and then all of a sudden the doctor came rushing in and was trying to get your heart to start beating.”

Tears pool in my eyes and fall down my face as I look at Mother. She had to watch all of that. Kieran had to feel it through the bond and also see it with his own eyes.

“Do—” I take a deep breath. “Do they know why it stopped? How did he know it stopped?”

So many questions run through my head from the information he just gave me.

Kieran shakes his head. “We have heightened hearing and he was paying attention to it while your mother was here. When he heard only one heart beat in the room, he knew something was wrong. They don’t know why me leaving triggered it, but I’m not leaving you again. If I have to go talk to people, you are coming with me or they are meeting us here. If I have to talk to all the people to explain things, you are going to be right behind me, sitting in a chair.”

“Could it be because of the wi—” I stop myself from even uttering what she is. “Have you found her?”

Terror runs through me as my eyes look around the room. Could she be in the room right now listening to everything being said? Was she behind my heart stopping when he left?

Kieran quickly hands the baby to my mother and cups my face with his hands, forcing me to make eye contact with him.

“We are not going to think like that.” Kieran gives me a firm look. “You are not going to give her any time in your mind.”

“How?” I ask. “Have you found her?”

I need to know the answer. The last thing I remember was her disappearing right before my eyes. Where could she have possibly escaped to?

“We haven’t found her yet, but we are going to. You don’t need to worry about it,” Kieran tells me.

“How can I not?” My voice breaks.

Anxiety runs through my body with all the scenarios going through my head.

“Because she cannot get into the palace,” Kieran says. “We have gotten rid of everything that she owned in the palace and cleaned the whole place so she can’t come back in. We have set up precautions that will work.”

“Are you sure?” I ask.

He nods. “I wouldn’t lie to you. You are safe in the palace. She cannot enter here any longer. And while we haven’t found her, we are actively searching for her carefully so nothing bad happens to the people looking for her.”

“O-okay,” I mutter.

Kieran pulls me into his chest and holds me close, making my whole body relax into his embrace.

“I will see you later. You talk to your mate,” Mother gently interrupts.

“You don’t have to go,” I quickly say and start coughing.

“You are still healing and just woke up. Spend some time with him. I’m going to be in my room in the palace so I won’t be far,” she says and slips out of the room.

“Her room in the palace?” I ask.

Kieran nods as he helps me sit up in the bed. “It was one of the first things I ordered Elias to do. Get your mother and baby brother with some of their belongings and have them move in here so I could keep an eye on them better,” Kieran explains. “I didn’t want them to be in danger in case the humans found out you were my mate and they did something to your mother and brother in retaliation.”

“Do you really think they would do something like that?” I ask, worry running through me now.

What if we can never walk back in town without having guards with us?

“Anything is possible right now,” he replies. “Times like this are very unknown and if anyone is frightened enough, they will do anything to keep themselves safe.”

Just like me. At one point I was willing to do anything to keep my family safe.

“But you don’t need to worry about them. I am going to keep each and every one of you safe from harm. Whenever we go out we will have guards with us just in case.” Kieran kisses my forehead.

I sigh in relief as he holds me close to him. Oh, how I have missed being in his arms, and now we don’t have to hide it.

“How bad is it out there?” I ask. “Have I really only been out for three days?”

He nods. “It’s only been three days. I was worried you would be out for a week or a month or never woke up.”

Kieran completely ignores my first question. Is it really that bad out there?

“Don’t worry, you are going to be okay,” Kieran whispers.

“Kieran.” I manage to pull away from him and look up.

“Sweets,” he mumbles.

“Can you please answer my question?” I ask. “Honestly.”

He sighs. “I don’t want to lie to you but I also don’t want you to worry about things while you are recovering.”

“I’m okay,” I try and reassure him. “I’m stronger than you think.”

Kieran cups my cheeks with his hands and gently caresses my cheeks. “I know you’re strong. With everything you’ve been through, you are incredibly strong, but I don’t want you to always have to be strong and go through things. I want to take care of you and make sure that you have periods of rest and can recover from things.”

A small smile forms on my face. “And I appreciate that. I really do, but I do want to know what is going on with everything out there.”

“Are you sure?” he asks.

I nod. “I’m positive. I really want to know what has happened in the three days that I was out. Is it a mess out there?”

“Not a mess but people are on edge and want to know what’s going to happen. Things are changing and not everyone likes when their lives change,” Kieran says. “Humans have been in control for over three hundred years and the curse breaking and Fae ruling is a big change. I’m not expecting things to go smoothly in the beginning. We just have to patiently show them that they aren’t going to be in danger and I want us all to be equals.”

“Is there anything that I can do to help you?” I ask. “Maybe I can say something or we can show them that you guys aren’t bad people.”

“If there is something that needs to be done, I will tell you, but right now the only thing you need to worry about is recovering from this. You are going to get better and stronger before you try to do anything.”

“Kieran, you really need to go out there and talk to them,” Elias says as he walks into the room.

“What’s going on now?” Kieran asks.

I yawn and look over at Elias. I was just about to fall asleep when he came walking in. Some much needed sleep.

“Some of the humans are demanding that you talk to them and explain what is going to be happening in the future,” Elias explains. “They are saying if you don’t come and talk to them that they are going to start a riot.”

I grab Kieran’s hand and give it a squeeze. “It’s okay for you to go and talk to them. I’m awake and nothing is going to happen.”

“I’m not taking that chance.” He gives me a sharp look. “I don’t want it to happen again.”

“Then I’ll sit on a chair behind you while you talk to them.” I suggest the same thing he said a while ago.

Kieran shakes his head. “I don’t want you to be out in the elements while you are still recovering. You look like you are sick and I don’t want them to get the wrong idea that I’m holding you hostage or have harmed you in any way.”

“Then we’ll show them that you aren’t doing any of those things. They know me and they know I wouldn’t lie to them,” I say.

But I have lied to them several times. When I came back after getting beaten up by Avira’s helper. Though at times I wonder if they knew it was all a lie about me getting mugged and they were just keeping up the lie so I wouldn’t get in trouble.

“They are also demanding to see Adeline and her mother,” Elias says. “They know you have them and they want to see if they are okay.”

“Kieran, you can’t put this off,” I tell him. “I know you want to protect me and make sure that I have the right environment to heal but this needs to be done or you are going to have a lot more trouble on your plate.”

He sighs and runs his hands through his hair. “I know.”

“You are going to be with me and my mom the whole time. You aren’t going anywhere. I’ll be safe,” I reassure him.

“And if you feel bad at any point you tell me right away out loud or through the bond and we’ll stop it,” he tells me as he makes eye contact.

“Yes,” I agree.

“And if you get too overwhelmed you also let me know. You are supposed to be resting and not putting much strain on your body,” he continues. “If anything, and I mean anything, feels off you just let me know.”

“Kieran,” I gently call.

“I’m going to be okay.”

“I know, I’m just worried,” he whispers.

“Everything is going to be okay. You will be with me the whole time.”

CHAPTER 31

Nerves run through my body as my mother and I stand in front of the main doors. Are we really going to go outside and talk to everyone? I don’t know if I can do this.

Everyone will be looking at us, asking questions, and it may get ugly.

No.

I can’t think like that. They know me and my mother. They have known us our whole lives and we have never done anything wrong.

“Everything is going to be okay,” Mother says. “I’m right here. Let me do all the talking.”

“No,” I whisper.

“Adeline, let me. I have known them for longer and they trust me. We’ve all helped each other out in life so let me do the talking,” she says. “If they ask you a question then you can answer it.”

I look over my shoulder at Kieran and he nods.

Do as she says, he says through the bond.

“If you need to sit down you just let me know and we’ll get you a chair.” Mother pats me on the arm. “The first thing I’m going to explain is that you were hurt and lost a lot of blood so they know that you aren’t well.”

“You’re going to tell them about the witch?” I ask. “How is everyone going to react to that?”

Everyone thinks Avira is still part of our family.

“Everyone has always known there was a witch among us. We knew that she placed a curse on the Fae but no one ever knew who,” she explains. “I’m not going to say who the witch is, not until we can get whatever spell she placed on the people away.”

Nodding, I grab her hand and give it a little squeeze.

“Ready?” Elias asks as he stands at the door.

“Wait,” I quickly say and look back at Kieran. “What happened to Henry? Where is he?”

The last time I saw him was when we came into the palace and Avira showed up.

“Is he okay?” I ask when Kieran doesn’t say anything.

“He was found unconscious when we got here. He has a concussion, and a broken leg,” Elias says before Kieran can respond.

“He is being treated by one of the Fae doctors and is looking like he will get better in a month or so. He can’t put any weight on his leg but Zahra is taking care of him,” Kieran explains.

“The first thing he asked about when he woke up was where you were,” Elias chuckles. “Oh, Zahra was mad.”

“Does she hate me?” I ask.

Kieran shakes his head. “No, she doesn’t.”

That is the last thing I want to happen. There is no way I am trying to steal her man.

I already have mine.

“Does she blame me for what happened to him?” I whisper.

Kieran walks over to me and cups my face with his hands. “She is not mad at you and she does not blame you for what happened. She knows Avira is at fault and that is who she blames.”

Nodding, I take a deep breath.

“High Lord, it’s time to go now,” Elias interrupts. “The longer we stay in here, the more people are going to wonder if you are coaching them on what to say.”

Will they actually think that?

Kieran lets go of my face and takes several steps back.

“Everything is going to be okay,” Mother whispers as Elias opens the front door.

Blinding light from the sun shines through and I hold my hand up to cover my eyes. Has the sun somehow gotten brighter since the curse has been lifted?

I push that thought to the back of my mind as we slowly make our way out of the palace and in front of hundreds of people.

“Hello, everyone!” Mother yells.

“Are you okay?” someone screams. “If they are holding you hostage, just blink twice and we’ll come and get you.”

My grip on Mother’s arm tightens at the realization of them being serious. Even if we somehow were being held captive, they wouldn’t be able to do anything about it. The Fae have gotten their powers back and us humans are no match for them.

Take a deep breath, Kieran reminds me.

I take several breaths as I try to calm myself down. Everything is going to be okay. Mother is going to get them to understand that we aren’t being held hostage and they are going to slowly start to realize the Fae aren’t a threat.

“Adeline and I are perfectly fine. She was injured by the witch and has been recovering the past couple of days,” Mother explains. “We are safe with the Fae and they are not going to harm any of you.”

“That’s not true! They broke the curse so they could rule over us again!” a man yells.

My whole body locks up. They weren’t the ones to break the curse.

“Have they harmed you yet?” I find myself asking.

Everyone goes quiet as their eyes fall on me. I suck in a breath as nerves run through me.

“Have they?” I ask again. “Since the curse was broken, have they harmed you?”

No one dares to speak.

“They haven’t because they don’t want to harm you,” I continue. I swallow, trying to coat my dry throat.

Sweets, Kieran’s soft voice says through the bond. Don’t push yourself.

But I can’t just not do anything. They are spewing things that aren’t true.

“What do you know about this?” another person asks.

“Because for the past year, I’ve fallen in love with a Fae. They don’t want to harm us and back before the curse was placed they never wanted to harm us. They want us to be equals and to live a peaceful and happy life. They want everyone to thrive and not live wondering when their next meal is going to be,” I say right before I go into a coughing fit.

My whole body protests and my grip on my mother’s arms tightens as my legs threaten to give out.

Kieran comes over to me, a glass of water in hand, and helps me take several sips of water.

“Don’t push yourself,” he says. “It’s going to take a while for them to believe anything we say. We have to show them.”

“But—”

“No buts. I don’t want you to exhaust yourself with this right now. You need to focus on getting better first.” He gives me a firm look.

Sighing, I nod and turn back to the people.

“I know it’s going to take a while for you to understand that they don’t want to harm you and I’m willing to be patient. I just ask one thing,” I say.

Mother gives my arm a gentle squeeze.

“I ask that you keep an open mind and heart about this situation. There are a lot of things that are in the unknown right now and we are working on trying to figure everything out. There are going to be bumps along the way, and no doubt each side will get annoyed with each other, but we need to show grace. Things are changing whether we like it or not, and you can choose to accept it and live peacefully, or you can decide to fight it every step of the way and your life be miserable,” I say. “Our hope is to get everyone to live peacefully and not struggle. We want Fae and humans to be equal.”

“Who is going to rule then?” someone asks.

“Kieran, the High Lord will,” I reply.

“And she will be right by my side.” Kieran grabs my free hand and gives it a small squeeze. “She is my fated mate.”

Several people start yelling over each other and I’m not able to catch a single word they say. But they sound angry.

“Kieran,” I whisper. “Maybe you should have kept that a secret for a little longer.”

He shakes his head. “Please, everyone let me say something.”

Everyone quiets down and looks at Kieran.

“She is my mate and there is nothing anyone can do. We both are going to be ruling as equals and hope that with lots of communication we can make the Fae and humans equals. That is what we have always wanted and will always want, and with Adeline by my side through it all I hope that you can be at ease,” Kieran says. “That is all for now. If you have any questions you can form a line to the left and there will be someone who will write it down. In a couple of days we will be standing out here like this and will answer those questions.”

“Why can’t you do it now?” a man yells. “We want answers right now.”

“Because I need to get my mate back to bed so she can rest. She just woke up today and is still recovering from almost dying,” Kieran replies. “She needs me by her side at all times and I do not want to exhaust her. So if you could give us a couple of days to allow her to rest and regain more of her strength, I would really appreciate it.”

“He’s not trying to push you aside, but Adeline was really hurt,” Mother speaks up.

“What happened?” Agnes asks as she makes her way to the front of the crowd. “She looks awfully pale.”

“She was stabbed and lost a lot of blood,” Kieran says. “After three days of being asleep, she woke up this morning. I didn’t want her to come but she insisted so she could put you guys at ease.”

Agnes takes several steps forward and Elias blocks her path.

“Elias, she’s not going to hurt me,” I mumble, feeling utterly exhausted. “We’ve known each other since I was born. She helped my mother.”

Elias looks back at me for several seconds before taking a step to the side.

“Are you worried we are going to hurt her?” a man asks. “It should be us worried that you are going to hurt her.”

“I would never hurt the High Lady. I would lay down my life protecting her before I even think about harming a single hair on her head,” Elias replies.

“They are just protective of me,” I speak up. “Worried that I am going to get hurt and they don’t want that.”

“Are you really okay, my dear?” Agnes asks as she gently places her hands on my shoulders.

I nod. “I’m really okay. They are taking care of me well and making sure I get all the meals and liquids I need to survive. Kieran is really protective and makes sure that I have everything that I need.”

She looks over at Kieran before looking back at me. “Does he really love you?”

I quickly glance at Kieran and he smiles at me.

“Don’t answer that,” Agnes whispers. “I can see the way you look at each other. He’s your soulmate.”

“He is, and I wouldn’t want anyone else,” I finally reply and look at her.

“Then I am happy for you. I know that you won’t allow anything to happen to us and I can see how much he cares for you. He’s not going to do anything to upset you.” Agnes pats my shoulders. “I’ll talk to some people. Don’t worry too much about us right now. Focus on healing.”

“Thank you.”

Agnes walks back to the crowd and faces them. “Let’s go back to our homes and get to work. She needs to rest. Just like the High Lord said, if you have any questions line up to the left and tell them.”

Mother lets go of my arm. “I’m going to go check on baby James.”

I turn to Kieran and rest my head on his chest, taking in a deep breath and slowly letting it out.

“Are you okay?” he asks.

“I’m tired,” I mumble.

Kieran picks me up and holds me in his arms. “Then let’s get you back in bed.” 

CHAPTER 32

“Have you gotten any closer to finding where Avira is?” I ask, anxiety rolling through me like harsh waves hitting the beach.

Kieran looks up from his paperwork and shakes his head. “She is hiding out somewhere. But we are trying to figure out how to kill her when we do find her.”

What?

My eyebrows bunch together. “It’s not as simple as putting a dagger in her heart?” I tilt my head to the side.

“No, it’s not. My father said there was a certain way to kill her, but he never told me what it was or how.” Kieran sighs and looks up at the ceiling. “We have a way to confine her to one of the cells if we do find her, but there is still the problem of how to get rid of her. She is going to be a problem for the rest of our lives if she stays alive.”

“But she doesn’t remember a lot of her spells without the book,” I point out. “She told me that she doesn’t remember most of them.”

Which is still weird to this day. How old is she and she doesn’t remember her spells?

“She wasn’t the brightest between her sister and her. She slacked off and wrote everything down while her sister memorized them,” Kieran explains. “The book has been locked away in the palace and there is no way for her to find it or even be able to get to it.”

I relax in my chair with those words.

“Do any of the Fae know how to kill her?” I ask.

He shakes his head. “None of them know. Back when my parents were ruling they didn’t want the knowledge to get out and someone kill the witches and start a war. So only a handful of people knew and they are all dead now.”

“Maybe your father wrote it down somewhere. A special object?” I try and think of anything. 

“There’s something bothering me about this. Like I should know the answer to this,” I mumble to myself. “It’s almost like I know the answer but I can’t remember.”

“Sweets, you probably don’t know the answer to it and it’s okay. You’ve helped out so much already,” Kieran says.

“But I feel like someone told me,” I reply, frustrated. “I just don’t know why I can’t remember anything.”

Everything is a haze right now. Things that I think are real aren’t and I’m missing parts of my memory.

“I think the lady told me,” I say. “She said something to me but I just can’t recall what it was. It’s almost like it’s been suppressed for a reason.”

“Adeline.” Kieran cups my face. “It’s okay. You don’t have to remember. Everything is going to work out on its own eventually. We are going to figure this out.”

“But I feel like I should know.”

“Look me in the eyes,” Kieran commands.

We lock eyes.

“You don’t have to know everything right away. You don’t have to put so much pressure on yourself to figure things out on your own. There are a lot of us looking for the answers and we will find them soon. I just need you to know that you aren’t alone in this any longer and we can work as a team,” Kieran says as he runs his thumb across my cheek. “Do you understand?”

“Yes,” I mumble. “Could he have written it down somewhere and hidden it?” I ask, bringing it up again.

“I’ve been looking through the palace but they got rid of almost all of my father’s things when they took over,” Kieran explains. “They didn’t want any trace of anything to prove that they were wrong.”

My eyes widen. “What about the library? They have some of the oldest books there under lock and key. Maybe it’s in one of those books.”

Kieran hums and nods. “I’ll have Elias and Zayden go and look for anything.”

“Or we could go right now,” I offer.

He shakes his head. “You are still recovering from dying.”

“Kieran, it’s been a week. I think I am perfectly fine now. My throat doesn’t hurt any longer and I don’t have any pain anywhere. I’m fine,” I reassure him. “Alaric said I was good to do anything that I wanted now.”

“I don’t want to risk it. It hasn’t even been two weeks since you were stabbed.” He gives me a pointed look. “I don’t want you to walk out there and something bad happen to you. I don’t want you to die again.”

“I won’t. You are going to be right with me the whole time. We haven’t let each other out of our sights since I woke up.”

A full week of laying in bed, rarely getting up. Today is the first day he has allowed me to get up and go with him to his office. Only because he had something really important to do. Otherwise, I feel like I would have been stuck in bed all day again.

“I need to do something or else I’m going to go stir crazy,” I tell him. “If you won’t allow us to go to the library to look at the books, then can we walk around?”

Kieran looks at me with unease. “I don’t want you to get hurt if something happens out there. The people are still a little restless.”

“And I think it would be good if both of us went out there to show them that we are a unit and that you care for me. Let’s show them that we still care about them.” I gently touch his arm. “Please?”

He sighs. “Only if we bring some guards with us.”

“Do we really need to do that?” I ask.

Kieran tilts his head and his right eyebrow goes up. “Yes, we do. I’m worried that if we go out and something happens that I won’t be able to protect you. I don’t want to do something that I’m going to regret toward the people because I’m trying to keep you safe, but if it comes down to that I will. I’m trying to make peace right now and I don’t want to play around with your safety.”

“Okay,” I finally say. “I agree.”

“They are waiting by the front door for us. Do you want to change into something or are you okay with that?” Kieran asks.

I look down at one of my many worn and old dresses. It’s the exact same one that I wore when I met Kieran for the first time.

“Yes?” I hesitantly say as I run my hands down it. “Should I want to change? I don’t have anything better than this right now.”

“You look beautiful.” He takes a step toward me.

“Do you want me to change into something better?” I ask.

He shakes his head. “No, you can wear what you want. I’m not going to dictate what you can and can’t wear when we go out. If you are comfortable in those clothes, then you can wear them. But eventually we will get rid of them and get you new clothes.”

“I don’t want to wear new clothes when everyone else is wearing clothes they’ve had for years,” I quickly say as I raise my hand in the air, stopping him from walking toward me. “I don’t want to live a better life than them when they are still struggling with daily things.”

Kieran cups my face with his hands and kisses my forehead. “You are going to make an amazing High Lady.”

“Kieran,” I whisper, emotions clogging my throat.

“I’m telling the truth. My parents would have loved you if they had the chance to meet you. Everyone is going to love you for who you are and I hope you stay this way the whole time. And I promise that you don’t have to wear anything new until you are comfortable with it. I don't want to make you uncomfortable. I never want to make you feel like you can’t show your face to people.”

“Thank you,” I mumble, feeling my eyes fill with tears.

Hearing that his parents would have loved me pulls at my heart strings. If only they were still alive and I could meet them.

“Come on, let’s go out.” Kieran lets go of my face and grabs my hand.

We walk hand in hand through the palace as we make our way to the front doors.

“How is Henry doing?” I ask as we get closer to the guards.

They are all Fae, the same height as Kieran. I’ve never been so close to so many Fae before.

“High Lady,” they all say and bow.

“Oh, please don’t,” I say before I can stop myself.

“Sweets,” Kieran says.

“I know they are doing it because I’m the High Lady but I’m not used to it. I’m just a normal person. You don’t have to bow to me, and please, call me by my name,” I quickly say as I grip onto Kieran’s arm.

Kieran chuckles and shakes his head.

“High Lady, we cannot do that,” a male says.

“And why not?” I ask. “I just want you to treat me like a normal person. Elias, Everett, and Zayden do it. Or they did it before. I haven’t seen them much.”

“Because you are the High Lady and deserve respect. You are the High Lord’s mate and mean a lot to us,” a different guard says.

“Kieran,” I mumble his name as I look up at him. “Please.”

“You may call her by her name,” Kieran says. “That is until she gets used to everything.”

“Yes, High Lord,” they all say.

“Come on.” Kieran tugs me toward him as he starts to walk.

“Is everyone going to act like that around me?” I ask. “I don’t know if I can survive this.”

“They will, but I’ve let everyone know to tone it down so you don’t get too overwhelmed. We don’t want you running away and hiding from everyone.” Kieran chuckles.

“I wouldn’t do that,” I mumble.

“But you might be tempted to if it gets to be too much. No one wants you overwhelmed right now,” Kieran says. “Where do you want to go first?”

“Can we just walk around the town and see other people’s stalls?” I ask. “Has the lady made any of the lemon candy?”

“Is she talking about Nila?” a guard asks.

“That is the only person who used to make the lemon candies,” another one replies.

“She hasn’t yet, but we can get her ingredients so she can make them for you. Do you still have some more left over or have you eaten them all?” Kieran asks.

I look away and rub the back of my neck. Kieran chuckles.

“That answers my question.” He gives my hand a little squeeze. “We can pick up the ingredients and you can officially meet her when we drop them off.”

“Thank you.” I smile before turning my head to the side. “Have you had her candies?”

The guards all nod.

“Did she only make the lemon candies or did she make other ones?” I ask. “Were there any that were your favorites?”

“I personally liked the strawberry flavored ones she made,” a guard chimes in.

“We liked the lemon ones the best.” A guard points to him and the person next to him.

“Adeline?” Someone calls my name.

The guards swarm around us as I grip onto Kieran’s arm tighter.

“Adeline, is that you?” the person calls again. “It’s me, Flynn. Your father’s best friend.”

CHAPTER 33

“Kieran, can you tell them it’s okay? I know Flynn and he would never hurt me,” I ask.

“You guys can stop,” Kieran says.

The guards move behind us and I see Flynn right in front of me.

“How are you?” he asks as he takes a step closer. “What has happened? I heard you were in the palace when everything went down but I wasn’t able to see you or your mother. You weren’t answering at your house either.”

“I’m sorry for worrying you,” I say. “I was hurt and put on bed rest for almost the past two weeks. I’m okay now.”

“What happened?” he asks.

Ever since my father died, Flynn has taken on being the father figure for me. He’s never going to replace my father, but it’s nice to know that when I do need help with something I can go to him and his wife.

“I broke the curse on the Fae and got hurt in doing so. Everything is okay but Kieran didn’t want me to do anything while I recovered,” I tell him.

“Kieran?” Flynn’s eyebrows bunch together.

“Right. Flynn, this is Kieran, my mate. Kieran, this is Flynn, my father’s best friend and hunting partner. He was the one that told me it wasn’t an accident.” I choke on my words.

“Nice to meet you, Flynn. I heard her father talking about you once a long time ago,” Kieran says. “You and your wife are welcome to come into the palace at any time if you want to talk to Adeline or her mother.”

“Why are they in the palace and not at home?” he asks. “Did you force them to go there?”

“Flynn.” I take a step forward but Kieran pulls me back to his side.

“It’s okay,” he says before looking at Flynn. “No, I did not force them. Adeline was unconscious, and when she woke up she needed to be close to me in order to heal all the way. As for her mother, I gave her an option to stay in the house or move to the palace for the time being while everything is being sorted out. I didn’t want it to get out that Adeline was my mate and people go after her mother and younger brother.”

“Is that so?” Flynn crosses his arms over his chest.

“Yes, it is. If you would like to ask her mother, you can go and do so. She is probably out in the garden,” Kieran replies. “They are free to move back to their house at any point under the condition that they will have guards near them, so no harm comes to either one of them.”

“Why do they need guards?” Flynn interrogates him. “Why are you taking care of them?”

“Flynn, I’m his mate. I love him and he loves me. We are destined to be together,” I explain.

“I’m asking him,” Flynn says. “I want him to answer me. Man to man.”

“More like Fae to man,” I mumble.

A guard chuckles but quickly covers it up with a cough.

Kieran squeezes my hand. “She is my soulmate and I want her protected at all times. With the Fae taking back over, I was worried that the humans might try to hurt them before we could explain everything to them. I did not want any harm to come to her or her family. That is why they need guards when they go out. As for me taking care of them, we are family. I want what is best for them at all times.”

Flynn hums and continues to look at Kieran. “I don’t know if I like this.”

“If you have any questions, feel free to stop by any time and ask me. You will never be turned away,” Kieran says.

“Unless he is in an important meeting or we are on a date,” I quickly chime in.

“Adeline,” Flynn says.

“I’m just being honest. There are several important meetings going on right now that he can’t miss. We want to show the people that things are going to get better for everyone. That humans and Faes are going to be equal,” I explain. “You are important to both of us, but right now it is hectic and he can’t miss these without it affecting the people’s trust. And us being on dates is important and I don’t want it interrupted.”

“Sweets.” Kieran gently says my name.

“I know you are stepping up for my father and are worried about me, but I am happy with him. He takes great care of me and makes sure that I’m healthy and doing okay.”

“I don⁠—”

“Flynn, it’s okay. I’m glad you are doing this, but I just wanted to let you know that while he says you can come at any point to talk to him, there are times when he might not be able to see you right away. Kieran won’t say it, so I will,” I say confidently.

“Your father would be proud of you,” Flynn whispers before looking at Kieran. “We should have an afternoon together to get to know each other.”

“You let me know when you are available and I will set some time aside for it,” he replies.

Flynn nods. “If you have any problems, let me know. I will be there in a heartbeat for you and your mother, plus baby James. And if he does anything bad to you, let me know and I will come and beat him up.”

The guard next to me stiffens and I take a step in his direction, trying to block Flynn.

“Flynn,” I say. “Don’t say that in front of the guards.”

“It’s okay,” Kieran says. “If I ever do something to harm you or your family he is more than welcome to come and beat me. I will gladly stay still to allow him to do it.”

My mouth falls open as I look at Kieran. “Are you serious?”

He nods. “I never want to harm you or your family. If it ever happens, I want there to be consequences.”

“I’m starting to like you a little more,” Flynn whispers. “I have to go, but I’ll let you know when I’m free.”

Flynn walks off before I can say anything.

“Kieran, you can’t be serious,” I finally say.

“I’m dead serious and I will let every Fae know so if it ever happens—which I hope it never does—I don’t want them to interfere,” he replies.

“You have already gotten whipped twice because of me,” I point out. “I don’t think you should get harmed any more.”

“If I ever harm you, I want Flynn to come,” he says. “Enough about this. Let’s go get the ingredients and hand them to Nila.”

“Don’t you think this is too much?” I ask as I look at the bags in Kieran’s hand. “I think this could feed hundreds of people.”

“But it’s only going toward you, me, and your mother. You love this candy and I don’t want you to run out,” he replies.

“I don’t want her to work too much,” I whisper.

Kieran stops walking and turns to me. “Sweets, she will be more than happy to make this for you. She was over the moon when she heard you loved them a lot.”

“I just feel bad,” I mumble and look away from him.

“Don’t.”

“Easier said than done.” I roll my eyes.

“Is this her?” a lady asks. “Is this the High Lady?”

My head pops up and I look around. A group of people are standing several feet away from us, looking directly at me. My hand automatically finds Kieran’s arm as I grip onto it.

“This is the High Lady, Adeline,” Kieran replies. “She’s a little shy and might get overwhelmed but you can say hi and introduce yourselves.”

“I’m Nila, the one that made candy for you several weeks ago. I’m so glad you enjoyed them.” An older lady walks up to me and wraps her arms around my body before I can do anything. “Any time you want candy, you just let me know and I will make it for you. No matter the flavor, you just let me know.”

“Oh, thank you,” I whisper, not knowing what else to say.

They know me and my name and who I am.

“I’m her daughter, Piper.” Another lady steps forward and waves. “Normally we would hug, but I don’t want to overwhelm you.”

“Hi.” I force a smile on my face.

Everyone else introduces themselves and I say hi to each and every one of them. By the time they say all of their names, my head starts spinning with too much information.

Kieran steps in front of the other people, blocking my view of them and cups my face with his warm hands.

“Are you okay?” he gently asks as we lock eyes.

“A little overwhelmed,” I reply honestly. “It’s a lot but I’m okay.”

“Do you want to take a break and go do something else?”

I shake my head before leaning into his right hand, closing my eyes and taking a deep breath. “I’m okay. We still need to give her the ingredients and I would feel really bad if we just left right after that.”

How rude would it be for me to meet them for the first time, drop things off, and then just leave like they didn’t matter?

No.

I can’t do that. I need to show them that I will be a good High Lady and that everything is going to be okay.

“I don’t want you to overwork yourself,” Kieran whispers.

“I’m not working,” I mumble back.

I open my eyes to see Kieran giving me a knowing look.

“You know what I mean. You are still recovering from not sleeping well for the past several months and coming back to life,” Kieran says.

“She died?” Nila raises her voice. “When did this happen? Are you okay? How are you alive?”

I grip Kieran’s arm and stare into his eyes. I had completely forgotten that they could hear us talking.

Kieran steps to the side of me and faces them. “When the curse was broken, she died. That is how the curse was able to be broken.”

Everyone gasps and looks over at me, their eyes filled with tears.

“Are you alright?” Piper asks. “Why are you out here right now and not resting at home?”

“That’s what I’ve been asking,” Kieran says.

“Kieran,” I mumble and glare at him. “You aren’t helping.”

“Dear, you should be home resting right now. You don’t have to come out and meet us. We are willing to wait until you have gained your full strength back and aren’t as overwhelmed with everything,” Nila says as she grabs my right hand and gently pats it. “We have waited hundreds of years, and waiting a couple more days isn’t going to hurt us.”

“I’m okay though,” I whisper.

She gives me a knowing look. “I know you probably feel restless, but you still need to rest and not push yourself. Listen to your mate and allow him to take care of you. It’s one of the many things he wants to do for you.”

“She’s right. I don’t mean to confine you, but I want you to get the rest that you need. You are finally getting full nights of sleep and you need plenty of those before you will be really recovered,” Kieran says.

“There is just a lot to do right now,” I mumble.

“And there are several people who can step up and help out. We are here to help everyone, and that includes you.” Nila pats my hand. “I know before this you stayed to yourself and had to do things on your own, but that’s not the case any longer. We are here to help you and we want to. It would be our honor if we could. You don’t have to hand everything over but you can start off small.”

“She’s right,” Piper chimes in. “So right now you don’t have to feel like you should stay with us because it’s our first time meeting. Go home and get some rest. We’ll have plenty of other days where we can meet and talk to each other.”

I look at everyone and they all nod their heads. “Okay.”

CHAPTER 34

Gasping, I shoot up in bed and look around.

“Kieran?” I call out his name as my heart beats faster.

I push the covers off of me and slide out of bed. I need to find him. Where is he?

“Kieran!” I yell his name as I walk out of the room. “Where are you?”

“Adeline?” Henry takes a step toward me but I quickly take one back.

“Where is Kieran?” I ask.

“He’s out talking to the people and should be back soon,” Henry replies. “He left a couple of minutes ago and said it wouldn’t take him long.”

“I need him,” I whisper as I move my body around Henry’s. “I need him. It’s important.”

“He’ll be back in a couple of minutes and you can talk to him then,” Henry says again. “How about you go back to your room and wait for him there.”

I shake my head. “No time. I know something.”

Dagger.

Important.

Where is Kieran when I need him?

“Adeline, please. He doesn’t want you to leave the room right now.” Henry stands in my way.

“Henry.” I lock eyes with him.

“Adeline, are you alright?” he asks as he searches my face. “What’s wrong?”

“I need him. What if she comes to him now and he isn’t prepared? What if something happens and I could have helped prevent it? What if⁠—”

“Adeline, take a deep breath,” Henry tells me.

“You don’t understand. I need to see Kieran before it’s too late. We don’t know where she is.” I mumble toward the end.

I take a step to the left and try to walk past Henry but he jumps in front of me again, making me take several staggering steps back.

“Please, Henry,” I beg him.

“Adeline, I know you don’t want to be touched right now but the High Lord gave me explicit orders not to let you leave the room until he comes back. He wants you safe,” Henry explains.

“What about him?” I ask. “Who is looking after him right now? Where is he? I need to get to him.”

“High Lady.” Henry uses my other title. “He told me if I needed to pick you up and place you in your room, that I could. Please don’t make me do it.”

“You don’t understand. What if she comes to him right now? What if I’m too late and lose him? I can’t. Please,” I say.

Henry shakes his head and stays in front of me. “I’m sorry, but I must obey him.”

Kieran? I call through the bond.

Sweets, what’s wrong? he asks.

Where are you? Henry won’t allow me to come and see you. Please, I need to see you. I have something important to say.

I pace back and forth as I wait for Kieran to reply to me.

“Henry, please just let me leave and go to him. You will be with me and I’ll be safe. Please,” I practically beg him.

“Adeline, I cannot go against the High Lord,” he says.

“So him and I aren’t equals?” I ask.

Henry shakes his head. “You are, but when it comes to your safety, I am on his side. He wants you here right now until he comes back and he must have a good reason for it. I just need you to be patient for a little longer and wait for him to come back.”

“Henry, you don’t understand. If you were in my position, then you would know that I need to get to him right now. I need to see him!” I raise my voice, not caring who hears me at this point.

I take a step to the right and Henry follows my movements.

“Sweets!” Kieran yells my name.

My eyes go wide as I stare at his running figure coming toward me.

“What’s wrong?” he asks as he stops right in front of me and looks up and down my body. “Are you alright? Are you hurt anywhere?”

“I’m not hurt,” I manage to get out.

“What’s going on then? What has you so shaken up?” Kieran asks.

“I know how to kill Avira,” I say.

His eyes widen, and he looks around the hallway. Several guards are behind Kieran, looking directly at us.

“Let’s go to my office,” he says.

Kieran grabs my hand and starts walking to his office. Henry and the other guards follow directly behind us, keeping watch over everything around us.

“You guys can wait out here while we talk,” Kieran says as he opens his office doors.

I step into the room, Kieran shutting the door before he turns to me.

“How did you find out how to kill Avira?” he asks as he sits down in his chair. “Come here.”

I walk over to him and sit sideways on his lap, looking him in the eyes. “It was the shadowy figure.”

Kieran’s eyebrows bunch together. “The shadowy figure? Tell me from the very beginning.”

“When I died, I told you that I saw a shadowy figure and she said something to me, but I couldn’t remember what it was. When I was asleep, I dreamed about it again and remembered what she told me,” I explain.

“What did she tell you?” he asks.

“She said I was the only one who could kill her and it had to be with the dagger you placed in my hand the first time we met,” I say.

“The dagger?” he repeats. “This dagger?”

It appears in his hands and I nod.

“That’s the dagger. The person said it was important, and that I was the one who had to kill the witch,” I say again.

Kieran shakes his head. “You are not killing her.”

“Kieran, if it’s the only way, then I have to.”

Kieran pins me down with a stare. “You are not going to kill someone. I do not want blood on your hands and you have nightmares for the rest of your life. You aren’t going to do it.”

I cup his face and gently caress it. “Kieran, I told you before that I wanted to kill her to make sure she was actually dead so I could live the rest of my life peacefully. I know you don’t want me to do it, but I think I’m going to have nightmares for the rest of my life and always be looking over my shoulders if I don’t do it myself.”

Kieran gently places me on the ground and stands up. “You are not going to do it.”

“Kieran, please listen.”

He shakes his head. “No, you are not going to do it and that’s the end of the discussion.”

Kieran walks out of the room before I can say anything more.

“Is everything alright?” Henry asks as he stands in the doorway.

I shake my head and look at the ground. How is this going to work?

“Do you want to go anywhere?” Henry asks.

“Yes,” I reply and run out of the office, chasing after Kieran.

He’s all the way at the end of the hallway, talking to several other guards.

“Kieran!” I yell his name and continue to run.

He turns to face me and stays silent.

“Wait! We are not done talking,” I say.

“We are if it has to do with the other matter,” he replies.

“No, you heard what I said, and it needs to happen!”

He fully faces me now, the guards around him looking down at the ground.

“We don’t need to talk about anything. We don’t even know if what she said is true or not. It could just be a ploy from Avira and we don’t have a clue,” he says.

“Kieran, think about it. Why would she bring me back to life when the curse would be broken?” I ask. “Why would she do a silly thing like that when it would bring you more suffering to keep me dead?”

Kieran growls and takes several steps toward me. “Because she is twisted like that. You don’t know the witch like I do.”

“Just think about it. The shadowy figure that brought me back to life didn’t give me that bad feeling Avira always gave me. She didn’t look anything like Avira.” I try to reason with him. “You have to believe me. I need to be the one who kills her with the dagger.”

“Adeline,” he says, and I flinch. “You are not going to get into harm’s way. Not after everything that just happened. You are not going to get blood on your hands when I already do and can kill her myself.”

“You aren’t listening to me,” I say, trying not to let the frustration pour out of me.

Everyone is staring at us right now and I know we shouldn’t be having this conversation out in the hallway. But Kieran walked out of the office, and if this is where we are going to have it then so be it.

“I’ve heard what you’ve said and I don’t agree with it. You don’t know who this shadowy figure is and if we can trust what she said,” Kieran says.

“She brought me back to life!” I raise my voice finally. “Isn’t that enough for you to trust her? Why else would she have brought me back to life?”

“Sweets.” He takes a deep breath. “You have to trust me.”

“And you won’t trust me?” I ask as I take a step away from him. “I’m telling you what I was told when I was dead. How she told me to stay near you and that I was the one who had to kill the witch. How the dagger was the way to kill her. She brought me back to life with this in mind.”

Kieran shakes his head and takes a step toward me, but I hold my hand up, stopping him.

“I need some time to think about everything,” I mumble, hurt rolling through me in waves.

“Sweets,” Kieran gently says.

I shake my head and look away from him, my feelings almost betrayed. I didn’t expect it to turn out this way.

“I’m going to go out in the town and walk around. Don’t worry, Henry will be with me to make sure I’m safe,” I say in a monotone voice.

CHAPTER 35

Itake several steps to the right and start walking, completely missing Kieran. Guards and servants look at me as we walk past but I don’t dare look them in the face.

Am I in the wrong? Are they mad at me for saying those things to Kieran?

But it was all true. With the things the person told me and him not believing me. He isn’t thinking it through. What if he tries to kill Avira with the dagger and something happens to him because it isn’t me?

“Are you alright?” Henry asks as we walk out of the palace.

“Do I look okay?” I ask weakly, having no energy to be snarky or argue with anyone else.

“No,” he replies. “You don’t but I don’t think anyone would after a conversation like that.”

“It makes me feel like he doesn’t trust me and what I heard with my own ears. The person wasn’t Avira, I know that for sure. I’ve felt that bad dread feeling all my life when I was around her, and this shadowy person didn’t have a trace of it,” I say. “Why would she tell me that everything is going to be okay and to remain by his side and remember the dagger? Why would she tell me that I was the only one who could do it if it wasn’t important?”

“Have you thought about it from his point of view?” Henry asks.

I glare at him. “Who’s side are you on?” I ask.

He holds his hands up in the air.

“I have thought about it. I know he doesn’t want me to kill Avira and have the blood on my hands. I know he doesn’t want me to have nightmares after about killing someone, but I think I will be better off having a couple of nightmares every once in a while, rather than looking over my shoulder every second of the day wondering if Avira is going to appear and do something horrible to me,” I ramble. “I want her gone just as much as everyone else does, but that’s not going to happen unless I’m the one who kills her. Kieran doesn’t know if there is going to be consequences if he tries to kill her himself. I don’t want anything to happen to him.”

“Have you tried telling him that?” Henry asks as we continue to walk.

I sigh and shake my head. “Not yet. This was the first time we talked about it and you saw how well it went.” I roll my eyes and then groan. “I should have waited until we were alone instead of doing it in front of everyone. What are they going to think about us?”

“That you are a normal couple who gets into fights,” Henry replies. “They aren’t going to think differently of you. You guys weren’t yelling at each other and getting ugly. Sure, you implied that he didn’t trust you, but the guards aren’t going to change their mind.”

“How are you so sure about that?” I ask. “Wait. Why isn’t there a Fae with us? I thought Kieran would have had a Fae guard following me.”

“He didn’t want to make you uncomfortable with a new guard, so I’m still your personal guard. There are plenty of Fae who are walking around and will jump in to help if something goes wrong,” Henry says.

My heart melts at his words. Kieran didn’t want me to be uncomfortable with a whole new person.

“That is unless they’ve changed their mind and they don’t like me any longer,” I mumble. “The news has probably already spread to every Fae that we got into an argument.”

“It has, but it’s going to be okay.”

Sighing, I continue to walk down the road. Several Fae have already set up their stalls to start selling things.

“Adeline.” Nila calls my name. “Come here, dear.”

I force a smile on my face as I walk to her. “Nila, how are you doing today?”

She frowns. “You don’t have to force yourself to smile after what happened. It’s okay to feel hurt.”

“I don’t know what you’re talking about.” I chuckle.

Nila grabs one of my hands and gently holds it. “You got into an argument with him and it’s good to be feeling those feelings. They are valid and I don’t want anyone else telling you otherwise.”

Tears pool in my eyes and I chuckle once again, trying to make myself happy so I don’t cry.

“It’s okay to cry as well. Things are changing and there are bound to be several arguments in your life. What you have to remember is not to go to bed angry at each other. Resolve it before you go to bed,” she tells me. “Now, do you want a piece of candy?”

I nod and she hands me a bag of lemon candies.

“Thank you,” I whisper and put one in my mouth.

“How about you sit behind my stall for a little while and when you are ready to go back to the palace you can,” she offers.

“Thank you,” I mumble and sit down on the ground behind her stall.

“Oh, don’t sit there!” Piper yells. “You are going to get all dirty.”

I wave her off. “I’m okay. I’m just going to relax a little.”

Piper looks at me with uncertainty but after a while she walks off.

“You rest, and if you need anything, let me know,” Nila turns around and says.

“Thank you.”

I sit there for a while, watching people stop at Nila’s booth and buy things. Every once in a while someone spots me and says hello but nothing past that.

My eyes start to droop and before I know it, I’m falling asleep.

“Thank you for telling me where she was,” someone says. “I was starting to get worried when she didn’t come home.”

“She was exhausted from everything and I saw it. Sorry I didn’t tell you sooner, I got so busy and by the time it calmed down it had been several hours,” Nila replies.

“I’m going to take her home. Thank you again for taking care of her,” Kieran says.

“Talk to her and really listen to what she has to say. She cares about you.” Nila chuckles. “Cares about you so much.”

“I will.”

I feel arms grab under my legs and around my upper back, pulling me into their body. I whine but keep my eyes closed.

“You’re okay,” he says. “Everything is okay. I’m just here to take you home.”

“Kieran?” I mumble.

“It’s me, Sweets.”

“I’m sorry,” I whisper.

“I should be apologizing to you.”

I snuggle into his chest and allow my body to fully relax in his embrace.

I hum. “No. I should.”

“Sweets.” He sighs. “I should have listened to what you were actually saying and not just telling you no. I was in the wrong.”

I blink several times as I look up at him.

“We can talk about this later. Just go to sleep,” Kieran says.

“Nila told me not to go to bed without resolving this,” I mumble.

Kieran smiles. “Good advice. She said the same thing to my parents.”

“So when we get to the room, we can talk about it?” I ask.

“Yes, we can.”

“You can carry me until then,” I mumble and snuggle into his chest, ignoring the feeling of people’s eyes on me.

I have no doubt that people are going to be talking about it. They were already talking about how Kieran and I got into a fight.

Nothing will ever be kept a secret here. Not unless we do it in a private room.

His chest vibrates as he laughs. “Your wish is my command.”

It doesn’t take us long to get back to the palace and into our room.

“Will it always be like this?” I ask as he sets me down on the bed.

“Like what?” Kieran looks at me as he pulls up a chair to sit in front of me.

“Them knowing that we got into a fight. Them knowing that something is going on between us. Will we not have any privacy?” I fidget with my hands as I wait for his answer.

“Most likely yes… with us walking off and our mood changing then they will most likely know that we got into an argument,” Kieran replies. “But whenever we do we can go to a certain spot so people don’t see us and they won’t be able to tell.”

I hum in agreement. Maybe that would be for the best. I don’t want them to know every time we get into an argument. Then I would never want to get into an argument again and be walking on eggshells the rest of our lives with the conversations we have together.

“Everything is going to work out,” he whispers. “We’ll get used to it and we will find out different ways to hide it from them so they don’t know. But right now it seems like they are keeping tabs on us because in a way they are.”

“Why?” I mumble.

“Because the curse is broken. Because we are finally free to be ourselves and you and I are the High Lord and Lady. We are going to rule over them and they are worried that us getting into arguments in the beginning will put a strain on everything, and they are worried we might not make it through.”

“You know we will.” I give him a knowing look.

“We do but they don’t. We haven’t said anything about how we are doing and that we are going to stay together no matter what. They are in the dark and are just worried about us. But we don’t have to worry about anything,” Kieran says. “We are just going to have to show them that they don’t have anything to be worried about.”

“Easier said than done.” I chuckle. “I’m joking. We don’t get into many arguments anyway. So I think it will be easy if we just walk around and be ourselves.”

Kieran kisses the side of my head. “Exactly. And when we talk to them they’ll realize just how much we love each other.”

“I love you,” I whisper as I look up at him.

“I love you too.” He gives me a quick peck on the lips.

We sit on the bed in silence for several minutes as we just stare at each other. Having the freedom to just do this is amazing, not having to worry about always being on guard in case someone walks by us.

“I’m sorry for not listening to you fully and trusting you,” he says after some time. “I just didn’t want you to go through anything that you might regret. I don’t want you to have blood on your hands and have nightmares after. To take a life… there are consequences after. You aren’t the same.”

“I know.”

“And I’m worried that you won’t actually be able to do it and she will attack you. You weren’t able to kill a deer,” he points out.

Sighing, I nod. “I know but this is the only way. If it’s what I have to do in order to get rid of her then I’m willing to do it. And I don’t think I will be able to sleep properly for the rest of my life if I don’t do it.”

Kieran cups my face and gently rubs his thumb across my cheek all while staring into my eyes. “Are you sure?”

I nod. “I’m sure and it’s the only way she is going to fully die.”

“We can keep her alive and in a cell hundreds of feet below the ground, heavily guarded.”

“Kieran,” I whisper. “I won’t be able to rest if I know she is still alive. I’m always going to be looking over my shoulder to see if she has escaped or asking the guards if she is still down there. I don’t want to live like that. I don’t want our future kids to live like that.”

Kieran sighs. “I wish there was another way.”

“Me too.”

CHAPTER 36

“Can we go out to the town and talk to people?” I ask Kieran as I walk into our room. “I think today would be a good day to go out and talk to humans and Fae.”

It’s been two months since I died and the curse was broken. Two months of everyone being on edge as things changed.

Fae knew what it was going to be like and were excited. Right from the beginning they wanted to be friends with the humans and coexist together… but the humans didn’t want that.

A lot of them were afraid and hostile toward any Fae who approached them. They didn’t want anything to do with them and were constantly worried about how things were going to turn out for them in the end.

Kieran and I have been going out at least twice a week to walk around and talk to both human and Fae to try and make them more comfortable. I’ve gone out almost every single day to try and show the humans that they don’t have anything to fear.

“Are you sure you want to go out today?” Kieran asks. “You were out all day yesterday with them and came back exhausted. Why don’t you take today off to just relax.”

I shake my head. “We can’t do that. We have come so far. They are getting more and more comfortable with being around the Fae and I don’t want to skip a day and all the hard work go down the drain.”

Keiran chuckles. “It’s not going to go down the drain if you miss one day. There are other people also walking around and helping. You don’t have to carry everything on your shoulders.”

“I’m not, but it’s good for me and you to go out and talk to people to show that there is nothing to be afraid of. We are an example and so are Zahra and Henry. All of us need to be out there to talk to them and show the humans that they have nothing to fear,” I say.

“Okay, but if I see you starting to get tired then we are coming back to the palace and you are resting.” He gives me a pointed look. “I don’t care if you try to change my mind… you won’t. You have been more tired recently and I’m not going to have you run yourself into the ground.”

“That won’t happen because you won’t allow it.” I smile up at him. “You are good at taking care of me. And my appetite has come back! So you don’t need to worry.”

“But you are still underweight and I don’t want you putting too much strain on your body and something happening.” He wraps his arms around me.

“I know but I have you to help me.”

Kieran shakes his head before kissing the top of my head. “Alright, let’s go then.”

I quickly grab his hand as we make our way through the hallways, saying hello to everyone who passes us.

“I still find it so weird to hear people calling me High Lady,” I mumble as we walk out of the palace.

“You are going to have to get used to it,” Kieran tells me.

“Why can’t I just have them call me by my name?” I ask. “What’s so wrong with that?”

“They respect you. They love you.”

“But what if it makes me uncomfortable?”

Kieran stops walking and looks at me. “They aren’t saying it to make you uncomfortable. They are calling you that to show you respect and that they care and love you. They are calling you High Lady because you have earned the title.”

“I didn’t do anything,” I mumble and look away from him. “Let’s get going.”

“Sweets, do you really believe that you’ve done nothing to earn your title?” Kieran asks as he catches up to me. “Do you honestly believe that?”

I nod. “It’s true. I haven’t done much.”

“You have done so much more than you think. You gave them hope when they were losing it. You put yourself at risk every single time you went to the palace to try and figure out how to break the curse. You sacrificed yourself by agreeing to marry the prince so that they didn’t kill me,” Kieran says.

“Oka—”

“You got tortured and didn’t tell Avira any information because you knew if you did that it would be over for everyone. You died to break the curse, fully prepared to leave everyone behind because it meant us Fae were going to get to live a better life,” Kieran whispers. “You have done so much and you are still doing things. You have earned the title and more.”

Tears pool in my eyes.

“I know it’s going to take you a while to really believe that you deserve the title and they are okay with that.”

I nod.

“The prince and king are waiting for you,” Elias says.

“What about Avira?” I ask.

“We have people looking for her in her last known location but there isn’t much we can do right now,” Kieran replies. “Do you want to come with me to see the prince and king?”

“What are you going to do with them?”

Kieran grabs my hand. “We are going to have a public execution.”

My jaw drops. “Aren’t you worried how the people are going to react to that?”

“Why would they feel anything but happy that they don’t have to deal with them any longer?” Elias asks. “They should be grateful that we are killing them.”

“A lot of people were very loyal to them,” I point out. “I know the majority didn’t like them, but⁠—”

“We know there are going to be people who will protest the execution, but they won’t be able to do much. It’s happening no matter what,” Kieran says. “We are prepared for the consequences and backlash, but I don’t think there will be much. They haven’t done anything yet.”

“Yet,” I repeat. “They could be plotting something right now and when they hear about the execution that could be the final straw.”

“Sweets,” Kieran gently says as he cups my face. “We are monitoring everyone right now. We are taking precautions and will have lots of people on the lookout when we do it.”

“What if something goes wrong?” I ask. “What if something you don’t expect happens and people die? What then?”

He gently rubs his thumb across my cheek. “We are going to try our best not to harm anyone. I’ve already told all the guards and Fae that if something happens, not to harm anyone. And as for something going wrong, we have several different ways that we will handle it. Everything is going to work out. You might be surprised at how the people handle it.”

I take a deep breath and lean into his hand. “When are you holding this?”

“Right now. A guard has made an announcement that everyone is to gather at the town square,” Kieran replies. “Do you want to come with me or do you want to stay here?”

What do I want to do? I hate violence, but I want to see them dead so I know they aren’t going to haunt me for the rest of my life.

“I’ll come with you,” I whisper.

“Are you sure? There is no shame in staying here,” Kieran says.

I nod. “I’m sure. Let’s go before I change my mind.”

Kieran lets go of my face, grabs my hand, and starts to walk out of the throne room. He leads me down to the dungeon, my hand instinctively tightening around his at the memories of everything Avira did to me.

“What happened to Nas?” I ask as I look at his now empty cell.

“After I brought you to the healer, I sent someone down to get him and put the prince and king in the dungeon,” Kieran replies. “He is safe and healing.”

My shoulders sag in relief. “Good.”

Kieran stops in front of the same cell I was once placed in. Sitting on the cold, hard ground are Prince Archie and the king.

“You’re okay,” Kieran whispers. “Nothing is going to happen to you.”

Taking a deep breath, I relax my hand around his and look at the two people in the cell.

Prince Archie glares at Kieran and our connected hands before looking up at me. “I thought you didn’t know him.”

Kieran squeezes my hand.

“That was all a lie to keep him alive,” I reply, my voice wavering in the beginning. “I knew you would kill him on the spot if I said I knew him.”

“She’s my mate,” Kieran says. “You never had a chance with her. It was all a front while we worked behind the scenes to get here.”

Prince Archie growls and lunges toward the bars. Kieran quickly steps in front of me before anything can happen.

“I knew I should have forced you to marry me sooner!” Prince Archie yells. “I knew I shouldn’t have trusted or listened to you! You whore.”

Kieran lets go of my hand and grabs Prince Archie’s shirt. “You will not call my mate a whore.”

“But that’s what she is! She was with me while also being with you! Who knows how many other men she has been with!” The prince chuckles toward the end. “Are you sure you want to be with a woman like that?”

“Kieran,” I say gently. “Please. It’s not worth it. You and I both know that I was with no one else,” I whisper.

Kieran lets go of his shirt and turns to the guards. “Take them out and bring them to the town square.”

“What are you going to do with us?” the king finally asks.

“You are going to be hanged for all your crimes,” Kieran responds.

“You can’t do this! We are royalty!” Prince Archie yells.

Kieran sighs. “Please bring them out to the town square.”

He grabs my hand and pulls me out of the dungeon and straight to the town square where everyone is already gathering. Nerves flow through me as all their eyes land on us, following our every movement. We stand hand in hand on the small stage.

The guards bring Prince Archie and the king up to the gallows and everyone gasps.

“Atention everyone!” Kieran yells.

All eyes turn to him.

“For the crimes of hurting the Fae, humans, and forcing people to do anything they wanted, Prince Archie and the king are going to hang,” Kieran announces. “For not taking care of the people.”

I hold my breath as I look at the crowd, their attention is focused on Kieran.

“What do you have to say for yourself?” a man yells, and our eyes connect. “Adeline!”

Kieran steps in front of me, but I gently place my hand on his back and step out from behind him.

“They have committed countless crimes over the years. Banishing people who shouldn’t be banished to Tarravega. Taking people who had magic into the palace to never be seen again. We lived in fear and it’s time to end that,” I reply calmly. “They have done enough damage.”

The whole crowd is silent as they look up at me, making nerves fester inside with each passing second.

“Hang them!” a female yells. “It’s no secret that everyone hates them.”

My gaze connects with Agnes.

“They have killed, punished, and banished so many people. Our people. Fae and Human. They should answer to those crimes!” she continues to yell.

“Everyone,” Prince Archie speaks, but his father shushes him. “Father! You can’t be serious.”

The guards place the noose around their necks.

“Wait!” Prince Archie screams. “You can’t kill me!”

“Kill them!” Agnes starts chanting and before I know it, everyone is chanting.

My hand tightens around Kieran’s as I look away from Prince Archie and the king.

“Do you have any last words?” Kieran asks.

“No,” the king says. “I have no regrets.”

I look up at Kieran to see him nodding his head, the sound of a lever moving before I hear unpleasant noises.

I bury my face in Kieran’s chest, taking a shaky breath in.

You’re okay, he whispers through the bond as he places a hand over my ear, blocking out the sound. Everything is over.

Are they dead? I ask.

Yes.

I pull my head away from Kieran’s chest and briefly peek over at their bodies hanging, wanting to confirm they are really dead.

Now all that is left is Avira.

CHAPTER 37

“Idon’t think we should be doing this,” Henry says as we sneak out of the palace.

“You don’t think a lot of things are a good idea,” I mumble. 

“But this is extremely dangerous and you don’t know what you are going to get yourself into,” Henry points out. “Do you even know how to fight? What if she comes out of nowhere and hurts you?” 

“That’s why I have you,” I reply. “You’re going to keep me safe through this.”

Henry groaned. “Adeline, that’s not how this works. I’m supposed to be guarding you.” 

I stop and turn to look at him. “And you are doing just that. You are guarding me and keeping me safe. I don’t see what the problem is.” 

“If the High Lord knew you were going to be doing this, he would have locked you in your room,” Henry says. “You know this is wrong and dangerous but you don’t care. What if you die?” 

I wave my hand and start walking again. “I’m not going to die. There are plenty of Fae around us that will know if something is wrong and I have you right next to me.” 

“Against a witch,” Henry sighs. “You know that I’m no match up against Avira, right? She’s already hurt me once before.”

“If you don’t want to come with me, then you don’t have to. I’m going to do this though.” 

Henry follows me as I continue to walk into the town and straight toward the forest. People wave and ask me how I’m doing. I reply and move on, on a mission to find Avira and kill her before she can do anything else. 

Kieran says no one has spotted her yet and I’m determined to do just that. 

“What about your mate feeling your emotions?” Henry asks as we walk past a group of Fae. 

“Shhh!” I look around. “Can you be any louder? We are trying to do this without him knowing. I don’t need him getting all angry at me.” 

“And you don’t think he’s going to get angry when he finds out that you did this later on?” Henry asks. 

I shrug. “If we find her and I kill her then he’ll be angry for a little bit, but I don’t think he’ll be mad at me for long. Not when I’ve killed her.” 

“That’s if you kill her! There is no guarantee that she won’t kill you. You aren’t her favorite.” 

Grinding my teeth together, I turn away from him. “Thanks for reminding me again. We’re going to do this and that’s the end of the discussion. If you don’t want to be here then you can leave and I’ll do it on my own.” 

Henry stays quiet as we walk further into the forest. Avira could be anywhere. She could be all the way in Hellhollow and this search would be pointless. 

But I have a gut feeling that she isn’t far away from us. 

“As for him feeling my emotions, I’ve got that under control,” I reply. 

“You blocked him, didn’t you? You do know he knows what that feels like and he’ll know something is up right away,” Henry points out. 

“I know that, and no, I didn’t block him. I’m keeping my emotions in check, though, you’ve made me very annoyed, but recently that’s been one of my more prominent emotions thanks to having to be in bed all day,” I say. 

Even though I’m fully healed, Kieran still wants me to be resting in the bed. He wants to make sure I’m fully healed before doing anything. 

I personally think he wants me in bed resting so I can’t walk around and find Avira or she finds me. He wants me safely tucked away where she can’t get to me, and while I find it incredibly sweet, I also am irritated because I’m the one who is supposed to kill her. 

I’m the one who can lure her out. 

“Do you really think he won’t know that you’re here?” Henry asks. 

I whirl around, anger coursing through me. “He won’t know unless you tell him! So I suggest you don’t.” 

Something rustles to the right and we both look over. Nerves and fear bubble up inside me and I take a deep breath, squashing those emotions down before Kieran can do anything. 

“Do you think it’s her?” I whisper. 

Henry gets in front of me, sword drawn. “Just stay behind me.” 

But after several minutes, nothing comes out.

“I was really hoping it was her. I was hyping myself up for killing her and it’s all gone down the drain,” I mumble. 

Henry relaxes.

“What do you think you’re doing?” Kieran asks as he wraps his arms around my waist. 

Screaming, I kick my legs back but Kieran is quicker than that. 

“Kieran, you gave me a fright,” I say as I pull away from him. 

He doesn’t look happy. 

“What are you doing here?” I ask as I take a step back. 

“What am I doing here?” he repeats my words and I nod. “Are you seriously asking what I’m doing here?” 

“Y-yes?” I hesitantly reply. 

“No.”

“No?” My eyebrows bunch together. 

“No, you shouldn’t be asking me that. I should be asking you why you’re here. I should be asking why my mate was seen rushing and sneaking to the forest. I should be asking what made you decide to come out here looking for Avira when I told you I don’t want you to do that,” Kieran says. 

Rubbing the back of my neck, I look around me to see no one. Where did Henry go? 

“You see, here’s the thing…” I trail off as I take a step to the left. 

“Freeze,” he commands and I stay frozen. “You are going to tell me what you were thinking.” 

“I wanted to find Avira once and for all and take care of her myself!” I raise my voice. “I don’t want to be stuck in the castle not doing anything while everyone else looks for her. No one is going to find her when she wants me and I’m the only one who can kill her!” 

Did he really not understand? 

He had to.

“Do you know how dangerous that was?” Kieran asks. “Do you know how worried I was when I heard from several people that they spotted you? Do you know that I rushed out of a meeting to get to you and make sure you were okay? Do you know how scared I was when I felt the fear through the bond?” 

“I know it was dangerous, but I’m just tired of sitting in the castle when I could be doing something!” I throw my hands up in the air. “I know it was dumb and I know I shouldn’t have done it, but I wanted to help.” 

Kieran steps forward and cups my face in his hands. “You are my world, and if something were to happen to you, then I don’t know what I would do with myself.” 

“Kieran.”

“Promise me that you won’t do something like this again,” he mumbles. “Promise.” 

“Will we work together?” I ask. 

He sighs. “We’ll work together for this. We’re going to find her. I know you want to and I want to as well.” 

“I promise.”

CHAPTER 38

“You spotted her?” I yell as I walk into the throne room. “Were you going to tell me you spotted her?”

Kieran stands up from his throne and meets me in the middle of the room.

“I had to hear it from Henry by accident as he talked to another guard about keeping me in the palace until you can track her down.” I lower my voice when he gets closer to me. “Why didn’t you tell me? I thought we were past keeping anything about Avira a secret.”

“I was just about to come tell you the new update, I promise. You can ask anyone in this room and they will tell you the truth,” he replies. “Elias came to me just now with another update. That’s why I couldn’t come to you in time to tell you.”

“I trust you,” I tell him. “I just… next time have a guard come and get me. I want to be part of this since I have to kill her.”

“Sweets.”

I shake my head. “No. I know you want to keep me out of things, so I’m not stressing and worried all the time, but being on the outside, not knowing anything, is far worse. My mind is constantly on her. I don’t have a moment where she doesn’t cross my mind. Is she going to come and get me right now or will she show up when I finally forget about her?”

I take a deep breath in and slowly let it out, trying to calm myself down. We are in front of people and we both agreed that we wouldn’t get into any arguments with people around.

“Next time I’ll have a guard come and get you if it’s something serious,” he finally says.

“For anything, not just something serious.” I give him a pointed look. “Promise me.”

He sighs. “I promise.”

“We are a team and you leaving me out of things doesn’t make me feel like we are a team. It makes me feel like I am inferior to you,” I say.

“Adeline, that was not my intention.”

“I know it wasn’t, but we promised to communicate with each other and I needed you to know this.”

“Thank you for telling me and I’m sorry that I made you feel that way,” he says.

Kieran pulls me into his embrace, and I allow myself to relax.

“Is there anything else you want to tell me?” he asks.

“Can you give me the dagger so I can keep it on me at all times?” I ask, looking up at him.

Kieran gives me an unsure look.

“Please,” I say softly. “What if she appears in front of me and I have time to kill her? If I don’t have the dagger, then I may die.”

Kieran growls. “You are not going to die.”

“I know I’m not going to.” Lie. “But I want to be prepared just in case something happens. Please?”

“Do you know how to use it?” he asks.

“Yes, I do. I’ve cooked before.”

He gives me a knowing look. “Cooking and killing someone is very different.”

“I’ve envisioned stabbing someone while I was cutting meat or vegetables,” I mutter. “I know it’s different. And I know that I have to aim for a vital part, my father made sure I knew what they were.”

Kieran runs his hands down the back of my head. “I don’t want to give it to you, but I will.”

“Thank you.”

I pull away from Kieran, and the dagger magically appears in his hand.

“We will get you a sleeve to put it in so you don’t harm yourself when you are carrying it,” Kieran tells me. “Now, how about we go enjoy some lunch.”

“Do you think this will work?” I ask as my palms get sweaty the more we walk in the forest.

“Yes, I think it will,” Kieran replies. “This was the last known place they saw her and I have no doubt she is still near.”

“But what if she doesn’t come because you are with me?” I can’t help but ask.

“She will come, don’t worry.”

I look around, but the forest is empty… quiet.

“I don’t think she’s coming,” I mumble. “Maybe we should just go back to the palace.”

I want to be anywhere but here. I need to be anywhere but here.

“You’re going to be okay. I’m not going to allow anything to happen to you,” Kieran says as we stop walking.

My hand holds the dagger as my eyes sweep across the forest, trying to find out where Avira is.

“Kier—”

The words fall from my lips as Avira stands right in front of us both.

“I thought you would never show up,” she says as she cocks her head to the side. “Do you know how many times I tried to get the guard’s attention?”

Before I can utter a word, Fae males surround Avira, grabbing her arms and placing some metal cuffs around her wrists.

“You won’t be able to cast any spells while these are on you,” Kieran announces.

“This seems too easy,” I mumble to myself.

“We cast some spells earlier that didn’t allow her to leave the forest,” Kieran tells me. “We knew she was in here, but not where. Avira has never been the brightest witch, have you?”

“She was always the dumb one.” Elias chuckles. “Lazy.”

“So don’t worry,” Kieran says.

I don’t know if I can do this, I mumble through the bond. I know I need to kill her but seeing her now… I don’t know if I can do it.

Then let’s do it together. We’ll both hold the dagger, my hand over yours. You can look away, he replies and then grabs my hand.

“Any last words?” Kieran asks.

“I should have killed you all in the beginning,” she spat. “I should have killed every single one of you with my bare hands.”

“Sadly, you weren’t smart enough to think ahead. Did you ever think the day would come when the spell was broken?” Kieran taunts her.

“No.”

“I hope wherever you go when you die is painful,” Kieran says.

Before Avira can say anything, Kieran lifts my hand in the air and plunges it into her heart. I stare in horror as blood pools out of the wound when Kieran yanks the knife out of her.

I continue to stare at her as the guards let her go and her body falls to the ground. I killed her.

I killed Avira.

Tears pool in my eyes, and I drop the dagger, looking at my hand.

“Shh, you’re okay,” Kieran whispers as he pulls me into his embrace. “Everything is going to be okay.”

BONUS #1

KIERAN

“Iwant to go get some of the lemon candy.” Adeline tugs on my sleeve. “Please can we go out now? They are all going to be sold out if we don’t leave now.”

I cup her cheeks and bend down so our faces are mere inches away from each other. “You do know she always puts a bag aside for you, right?”

“I’ve told her many times not to and maybe she finally listened to me. You never know.” She pushes her bottom lip out.

I shake my head. “She is never going to listen to you on this matter. She knows how much you love them and is always going to set them aside for you. Trust me. Be thankful she is even allowing you to pay for them.”

“Do you know how long it took me to get her to accept money from me?” she grumbles under her breath. “I’m not going to stop trying.”

“Sweets,” I say. “Pick your battles. She is allowing you to pay for the candy. Don’t force her to do something else she doesn’t want to do.”

“Okay,” she mumbles.

I let go of her face and grab her hand. “Let’s go get your bag of candy.”

We walk in silence out of the palace.

Things have settled down in Bellhollow. Everyone is starting to thrive and get along with each other.

Adeline has stopped having nightmares about killing Avira, thankfully. We buried Avira’s body at the edge of the land where no one can find her.

“Can we also stop by my mother’s shop?” she asks. “Maybe I can see if she needs any help washing the clothes or sewing.”

I chuckle. “Are you that bored?”

“Not really,” she says quietly. “Okay, maybe a little. I went from not really having the time to just breathe, to all of the sudden having all of this free time and I don’t know what to do.”

I turn to Sweets. “I don’t want you to overwork yourself.”

“I’m not going to but it would be nice to be able to do something,” she replies.

“What would you like to do? Do you want to try anything new?” I ask.

We start walking again and Sweets stays silent.

“What have you always wanted to do but never had the time or money to do?” I ask.

“I don’t know,” she mumbles. “I never really gave myself a chance to think about it. I didn’t want to give myself false hope of something that may never happen.”

“Think about it and when you come up with an answer, tell me. You’ll be able to do it.”

Adeline shakes her hands in front of her. “I don’t⁠—”

“Adeline, everyone has the chance to do something that they’ve always wanted to do right now. It’s your turn to really think about what you want to do and give it a shot,” I say.

I want to be able to give her the opportunity to do something that she has always dreamed of but knew she couldn’t do while under the old king’s rule.

“Just think about it. You don’t have to give me an answer today but I want you to really think about it. And if you have no clue, then come up with several things that you would like to try and we can do all of them. Then you can figure out which ones you really like and which ones you don’t,” I continue. “Your mother has decided to start making baby clothes. She told me it was something she has always wanted to do but she wasn’t able to since not a lot of people were having babies.”

“What changed?” she whispers.

“The curse was broken. People are now finding their mates and falling in love. I have no doubt soon we are going to have a lot of babies and there won’t be enough clothes for them all. So your mother decided that since she has always wanted to do it she was going to start now so when people have kids, she can sell them the clothes,” I explain.

Her mother had come to me several weeks ago to talk about wanting to start it but was unsure. But with some nudges from me and another Fae female who used to make baby clothes, she finally succumbed to our suggestions.

“Just think about it,” I urge her.

“Okay, I will.”

I hold my hand out and she grabs it, allowing me to lead her to Nila.

“Oh good, you are here! I was wondering if you were going to come today or not,” Nila says as she pulls out a bag from under her stall.

“We would have come sooner but Kieran wanted me to think about something,” she giggles. “I think he secretly wanted me to forget about it since it’s a bad habit of mine.”

Nila laughs and shakes her head. “He would never do that. It brings you too much happiness for him to tell you to stop. Isn’t that right, High Lord?”

“Guilty.” I smile. “I will gladly take you to get anything you want every day if it brings a smile to your face.”

“Oh, Kieran.” Adeline gently slaps my arm. “Stop.”

I grab her free hand and bring it up to my lips, planting a gentle kiss on the back of her hand. “I will never stop. I want you to be so happy. I don’t want you to ever be sad again or go through anything hard.”

“I would think hard about those words, High Lord,” Nila says, interrupting me. “Being pregnant isn’t easy and giving birth is a whole other thing.”

“I guess you don’t want kids then if you don’t want me to go through anything hard?” Sweets asks.

I shake my head and rub my thumb across the back of her hand. “Then I’ll have to think of a different way to say it because I want kids, and many of them. So many that we’ll have to hire someone to help us take care of them so we can have a break.”

“Kieran.” She slaps my arm and giggles.

“But it’s all up to you and what you want,” I say. “You are the one who is giving birth to them. So if you don’t want a lot, then we won’t.”

Her whole body melts into mine as I say those words.

“You have always had a way with words,” Nila says as she shakes her head. “But enough of that. Do you want to learn how to make candy?”

I look down at Sweets to see her looking at Nila with hesitation written all over her face.

“If you want to learn how to make candy, you can,” I tell her. “You can do anything you want.”

“I don’t know,” she mumbles.

“If you want to learn, you just let me know. But you have to promise me something,” Nila says.

“Yes?” Adeline leans forward.

“If you do want to learn, you have to promise that no matter how good you are, you will still come and get candy from me. I want to see you every day. Do you think you can do that?” Nila asks.

Adeline chuckles. “Of course. I have no doubt that it will taste better if you make it for me.”

“Well, we are going to go to the next shop. I have something I want to show Sweets,” I tell Nila. “We’ll see you tomorrow.”

They wave at each other as Adeline and I walk away from the stall.

“Where are we going?” she asks.

“A surprise,” I tell her.

“Is it in town?”

I chuckle and look down at her. “It’s a surprise, so I can’t tell you anything without giving it away.”

“But I want to know what it is.” She pushes her bottom lip out.

“And in a couple of minutes, you will. Be patient.”

Adeline squeezes my hand. “That’s never been my strong suit and you know it.”

Chuckling, I walk in the direction of a painter.

“I bought something for you,” I finally tell her.

“What?” she asks. “You didn’t have to buy me anything.”

“I wanted to.”

We stop in front of my favorite painter, Michael.

“High Lord! I was wondering when you were going to stop by with her.” Michael turns around and smiles. “Come this way. I finished it up a couple of days ago.”

Adeline’s eyebrows bunch together as I pull her into the shop.

“You bought a painting?” she asks.

I nod. “Not just any painting, but I had him paint a special one for you.”

“Kieran, you didn’t have to do that. I still have the other one,” she whispers.

“You don’t. You had it on you when you were stabbed and it got soaked with blood and ruined,” I tell her.

I didn’t think her having the painting of my eyes would mean so much to her, but I had caught her countless times looking into my eyes or thinking about them. The amount of times she accidentally broadcasted her thoughts about my eyes to me was a lot.

“Kieran” Her voice goes soft. “I have you now.”

“I know, but now whenever I’m on official business somewhere and you can’t come with me then you can look at it,” I tell her. “This painting is a little bigger than the other one. And one day we are going to come in here and sit so he can paint both of us together.”

“Why don’t we do it now?” Adeline asks.

“Because I didn’t give him a heads up,” I whisper toward her.

“I have time now if you want to get started on it. I have a really good memory so once I get the outline down and the base colors, I can finish it off later,” Michael says. “But that is only if you want to do it now.”

“I want to do it now.” Adeline smiles and jumps up and down in place.

“How could I say no to you?” I mumble before turning to Michael. “Are you sure you have time?”

He nods. “I will always have time to take any commission from you two.”

“Maybe one day you can get one of me and my mother. Or maybe one of my mother and father. Can he see memories like you can?” Adeline asks as she turns to me.

“I can,” Michael replies.

“Then I think it would be a good present for my mother. One with her and father. She doesn’t have a picture of him anywhere and I know that she would love one.”

I cup her face in my hands. “That would be lovely and I know she would appreciate it a lot.”

“I just wish he was here to see this. I know he would be happy.”

“And proud of you and everything that you have gone through,” I say.

Tears well up in her eyes and I gently wipe my thumb under her eye.

“I’ll pay for both of them now. You can look at Adeline’s memory to get a picture of her mother and father. Take your time with them, especially the one of her parents,” I tell Michael.

“Yes, High Lord.” He bows. “You two can sit here and I’ll start on the painting.”

BONUS #2

KIERAN

“How is Adeline holding up?” Zayden asks as he continues to look down at the book.

I lean my head back and take a deep breath. I should never have let her try and find the spell book. I should have never told her about it.

“Kieran?” Zayden stops what he’s doing and looks at me. “How is she doing? We haven’t seen her walk out of her house for a while.”

“She’s healing.” My voice is full of emotion.

Guilt courses through me every time I think about Adeline and how hurt she was. The little glimpse I got of her when she first left the palace and walked into town.

So bruised.

Dragging her left leg.

One eye swollen shut.

She looked to be in so much pain, about to pass out, and yet she was determined to get back to her house.

“Have you talked to her?” he asks.

Kieran? Adeline’s weak voice says through the bond.

I hold up my finger towards Zayden and concentrate on Sweets.

I’m here, I reply.

Are you okay? she asks. I can feel some emotion from you.

I’m sorry you had to feel that. I was just talking to Zayden about something.

I’m tempted to block her off from feeling my emotions right now, but I told her we wouldn’t do that. And I’m going to feel even more guilty if I do it now and break that promise when there isn’t a good reason for it.

“Let me guess, you are talking to her right now.” Zayden gives me a knowing look. “It’s okay. I know she comes before me.”

Please don’t hide it away from me, Adeline says quickly. I know you want to keep me calm and relaxed while I’m healing, but please don’t hide it from me. I want to feel some sort of normalcy through all of this chaos.

“Leave him alone. He doesn’t get to talk to her much right now with everything she has gone through,” Everett says, smacking Zayden on the arm.

I won’t, I reply. But I don’t want you to worry about me at all. I want you to focus on healing and taking care of yourself. I need you to get better.

Can you hum to me so I can fall asleep? she asks.

Of course. Are you already in bed?

I look at Everett and Zayden. “I’ll be right back.”

“Ooo, what are you going to do?” Zayden calls after me. “Are you going to go sing her to sleep?”

I am now, she mumbles.

I turn around. “And if I am?” I raise an eyebrow.

“Shit. I didn’t think you were actually going to. Has anyone ever heard you sing? Should you try it out with us first before you ruin your reputation with her and she never wants to talk to you again?” Zayden chuckles at the end. “We’ll be brutally honest with you.”

Shaking my head, I walk away from them. I could’ve hummed to her right next to them but I didn’t want them to interrupt me and Adeline not be able to go to sleep.

She needs all the rest she can get.

Ready? I ask.

I start to hum to her, keeping my pace and tone even. After several minutes I stop humming and gently call out her name, only to be met with silence. A small smile forms on my face as I walk back over to Everett and Zayden.

“She asleep?” Everett asks.

“She is. Hopefully she can sleep for a while.” I sigh and sit down next to Zayden. “How is it going?”

“There are so many spells in here and we haven’t seen this language, let alone read or spoken it in forever. Do you know anyone who is fluent in this?” Zayden asks.

I shake my head. “Not many people were exposed to the witch’s language. Only the higher ups which are us. The other people passed away long ago.”

“Then we’ll need to have someone always here trying to figure out which spell it is,” Zayden declares. “Work around the clock so we can figure this out and get it done. The sooner we get this figured out, the sooner Adeline can rest in peace.”

“How is she holding up?” Everett asks. “Has she healed from everything?”

“I haven’t seen her since the first day but she said she is healing nicely but slowly,” I reply. “Maybe soon I will be able to see her in person and decide for myself if she is really doing okay or not.”

“Do you know when that will be?” Everett asks.

Sighing, I roll my neck before looking at him. “I don’t, and I don’t know when I will find out.”

He holds his hands up in the air. “Sorry for asking.”

“He just doesn’t know when and he wants to see her now. He felt all of her pain until she blocked him out. He got told what she looked like when she arrived in town and knew it was bad. He is just on edge,” Zayden speaks up before I can.

“Sorry,” I mumble as I run my hands through my hair.

“No worries. I shouldn’t have been asking questions about her right now. If I was in your shoes I wouldn’t be this calm,” Everett says. “I probably would have gotten myself whipped, or worse… killed for trying to get to her.”

Everything in me wants to stalk to her house and demand that I see how she is doing. But I know the town is crawling with people and guards. There is no way I would be able to get to her before someone stopped me.

“Let’s just get back to work.” I point toward the book.

“I just want to lie down,” she whispers. “Can I do that?”

“Of course, Sweets.”

I help Adeline lie down, her head on my lap.

“I’ll wake you when the time comes,” I gently tell her as she closes her eyes.

“I don’t want to sleep. I want to talk to you the whole time,” she mumbles.

A smile forms on my face. “Okay, we can talk,” I reply as I run my hands through her hair.

“Don’t let me fall asleep. Please, I want to spend my time with you talking and not sleeping.” She briefly looks at me.

“Adeline,” I mumble. “It’s okay if you fall asleep. We’ll have plenty of other times to talk to each other.”

“But I’ll feel bad for you. You will get bored.”

I continue to run my hands through her hair, trying to get her to fall asleep. “I won’t be bored, don’t worry. You just relax and fall asleep.”

Adeline lets out a breath and I feel her whole body relax.

“Good girl,” I mumble as I look down at her.

I watch her peacefully sleep.

“I thought she was going to fight harder to stay awake,” Elias says as he walks into the clearing.

“I knew she wouldn’t. She’s absolutely exhausted. Sweets was falling asleep sitting right next to me,” I say.

“How is she holding up?” Elias asks.

Sighing, I look at her exhausted body. “She’s not sleeping much because of the nightmares and not feeling safe. I wish there was something I could do, but I can’t.”

“Soon.”

I shake my head. “Not soon enough. She’s losing weight… weight she desperately needs. I don’t want her to wither away before the curse is broken.”

Elias gently places his hand on my shoulder, giving it a little squeeze. “She won’t, and you have to trust her on that. Anyone in her position would go through the same thing she’s going through. But she’s going to make it out. She has an amazing group of people who are right there beside her.”

“I know.”

I look at Adeline and gently run my knuckles against her cheek.

“Everything is going to be okay,” I whisper. 

KEEP UP WITH MAEVE!

SCAN the image to sign up for my newsletter to get teasers, cover reveals, updates, and extra content!

ALSO BY MAEVE KENSINGTON

Paranormal Romance Books

1. His Blind Mate

2. His Precious Mate

3. The King’s Mute Mate

Manteo Love

1. Protecting Olivia

Romantasy Books

1. Kingdom of Betrayal and Unknown

2. Kingdom of Darkness and Trials

3. Kingdom of Death and Hope

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

There are so many people I want to thank.

Thank you to all the beta readers for taking your time to read my rough draft and point out things that needed to change, things that needed to be clarified more, and overall everything.

Thank you to my editor and proofreader for making this the best story possible.

Thank you to my ARC readers!

I really appreciate everyone I mentioned and didn’t mention. Thank you to everyone who has taken the time to read this book.

ABOUT MAEVE KENSINGTON

Maeve Kensington is a Romantasy author of possessive, protective and dark MMCs.

When she's not writing, you can find her riding her motorcycle, hanging out with friends, reading, rewatching How to Train Your Dragon & Pride and Prejudice while working on her quilt.